Sumerian language

Author: www.NiNa.Az
Mar 08, 2025 / 10:59

Sumerian Sumerian ๐’…ด๐’‚  romanized eme gir15 lit native language was the language of ancient Sumer It is one of the oldest a

Sumerian language
Sumerian language
Sumerian language

Sumerian (Sumerian: ๐’…ด๐’‚ , romanized:ย eme-gir15, lit.โ€‰''native language'') was the language of ancient Sumer. It is one of the oldest attested languages, dating back to at least 2900 BC. It is a local language isolate that was spoken in ancient Mesopotamia, in the area that is modern-day Iraq.

Sumerian
๐’…ด๐’‚ 
eme-gir15
image
Nativeย toSumer and Akkad
RegionMesopotamia (modern-day Iraq)
EraAttested from c.โ€‰2900ย BC. Went out of vernacular use around 1700 BC; used as a classical language until about 100 AD.
Dialects
  • Emesal
  • Southern Sumerian
  • Northern Sumerian
Sumero-Akkadian cuneiform
Language codes
ISO 639-2sux
ISO 639-3sux
uga
Glottologsume1241
This article contains IPA phonetic symbols. Without proper rendering support, you may see question marks, boxes, or other symbols instead of Unicode characters. For an introductory guide on IPA symbols, see Help:IPA.

Akkadian, a Semitic language, gradually replaced Sumerian as the primary spoken language in the area c.โ€‰2000ย BC (the exact date is debated), but Sumerian continued to be used as a sacred, ceremonial, literary, and scientific language in Akkadian-speaking Mesopotamian states such as Assyria and Babylonia until the 1st century AD. Thereafter, it seems to have fallen into obscurity until the 19th century, when Assyriologists began deciphering the cuneiform inscriptions and excavated tablets that had been left by its speakers.

In spite of its extinction, Sumerian exerted a significant influence on the languages of the area. The cuneiform script, originally used for Sumerian, was widely adopted by numerous regional languages such as Akkadian, Elamite, Eblaite, Hittite, Hurrian, Luwian and Urartian; it similarly inspired the Old Persian alphabet which was used to write the eponymous language. The influence was perhaps the greatest on Akkadian, whose grammar and vocabulary were significantly influenced by Sumerian.

Stages

image
This proto-literate tablet (c. 3100ย โ€“ 2900 BC) records the transfer of a piece of land (Walters Art Museum, Baltimore)
image
The first known Sumerian-Akkadian bilingual tablet dates from the reign of Rimush. Louvre Museum AO 5477. The top half is in Sumerian, the bottom half is its translation in Akkadian.

The history of written Sumerian can be divided into several periods:

  • Proto-literate period โ€“ c. 3100 BC to c. 3000 BC
  • Archaic Sumerianย โ€“ c.โ€‰3000ย BC to c.โ€‰2500ย BC
  • Old or Classical Sumerianย โ€“ c.โ€‰2500ย BC to c.โ€‰2350ย BC
  • Old Akkadian Sumerian โ€“ c. 2350 โ€“ 2200 BC
  • Neo-Sumerianย โ€“ c.โ€‰2200ย BC to c.โ€‰2000ย BC, further divided into:
    • Early Neo-Sumerian (Lagash II period) โ€“ c. 2200 BC to c. 2100 BC
    • Late Neo-Sumerian (Ur III period) โ€“ c. 2100 BC to c. 2000 BC
  • Old Babylonian Sumerian โ€“ c. 2000 BC to c. 1600 BC
  • Post-Old Babylonian Sumerian โ€“ after c.โ€‰1600ย BC.

The pictographic writing system used during the Proto-literate period (3200 BC โ€“ 3000 BC), corresponding to the Uruk III and Uruk IV periods in archeology, was still so rudimentary that there remains some scholarly disagreement about whether the language written with it is Sumerian at all, although it has been argued that there are some, albeit still very rare, cases of phonetic indicators and spelling that show this to be the case. The texts from this period are mostly administrative; there are also a number of sign lists, which were apparently used for the training of scribes.

The next period, Archaic Sumerian (3000 BC โ€“ 2500 BC), is the first stage of inscriptions that indicate grammatical elements, so the identification of the language is certain. It includes some administrative texts and sign lists from Ur (c. 2800 BC). Texts from Shuruppak and Abu Salabikh from 2600 to 2500 BC (the so-called Fara period or Early Dynastic Period IIIa) are the first to span a greater variety of genres, including not only administrative texts and sign lists, but also incantations, legal and literary texts (including proverbs and early versions of the famous works The Instructions of Shuruppak and The Kesh temple hymn). However, the spelling of grammatical elements remains optional, making the interpretation and linguistic analysis of these texts difficult.

The Old Sumerian period (2500-2350 BC) is the first one from which well-understood texts survive. It corresponds mostly to the last part of the Early Dynastic period (ED IIIb) and specifically to the First Dynasty of Lagash, from where the overwhelming majority of surviving texts come. The sources include important royal inscriptions with historical content as well as extensive administrative records. Sometimes included in the Old Sumerian stage is also the Old Akkadian period (c. 2350 BC โ€“ c. 2200 BC), during which Mesopotamia, including Sumer, was united under the rule of the Akkadian Empire. At this time Akkadian functioned as the primary official language, but texts in Sumerian (primarily administrative) did continue to be produced as well.

The first phase of the Neo-Sumerian period corresponds to the time of Gutian rule in Mesopotamia; the most important sources come from the autonomous Second Dynasty of Lagash, especially from the rule of Gudea, which has produced extensive royal inscriptions. The second phase corresponds to the unification of Mesopotamia under the Third Dynasty of Ur, which oversaw a "renaissance" in the use of Sumerian throughout Mesopotamia, using it as its sole official written language. There is a wealth of texts greater than from any preceding time โ€“ besides the extremely detailed and meticulous administrative records, there are numerous royal inscriptions, legal documents, letters and incantations. In spite of the dominant position of written Sumerian during the Ur III dynasty, it is controversial to what extent it was actually spoken or had already gone extinct in most parts of its empire. Some facts have been interpreted as suggesting that many scribes and even the royal court actually used Akkadian as their main spoken and native language. On the other hand, evidence has been adduced to the effect that Sumerian continued to be spoken natively and even remained dominant as an everyday language in Southern Babylonia, including Nippur and the area to its south.

By the Old Babylonian period (c. 2000 โ€“ c. 1600 BC), Akkadian had clearly supplanted Sumerian as a spoken language in nearly all of its original territory, whereas Sumerian continued its existence as a liturgical and classical language for religious, artistic and scholarly purposes. In addition, it has been argued that Sumerian persisted as a spoken language at least in a small part of Southern Mesopotamia (Nippur and its surroundings) at least until about 1900 BC and possibly until as late as 1700 BC. Nonetheless, it seems clear that by far the majority of scribes writing in Sumerian in this point were not native speakers and errors resulting from their Akkadian mother tongue become apparent. For this reason, this period as well as the remaining time during which Sumerian was written are sometimes referred to as the "Post-Sumerian" period. The written language of administration, law and royal inscriptions continued to be Sumerian in the undoubtedly Semitic-speaking successor states of Ur III during the so-called Isin-Larsa period (c. 2000 BC โ€“ c. 1750 BC). The Old Babylonian Empire, however, mostly used Akkadian in inscriptions, sometimes adding Sumerian versions.

The Old Babylonian period, especially its early part, has produced extremely numerous and varied Sumerian literary texts: myths, epics, hymns, prayers, wisdom literature and letters. In fact, nearly all preserved Sumerian religious and wisdom literature and the overwhelming majority of surviving manuscripts of Sumerian literary texts in general can be dated to that time, and it is often seen as the "classical age" of Sumerian literature. Conversely, far more literary texts on tablets surviving from the Old Babylonian period are in Sumerian than in Akkadian, even though that time is viewed as the classical period of Babylonian culture and language. However, it has sometimes been suggested that many or most of these "Old Babylonian Sumerian" texts may be copies of works that were originally composed in the preceding Ur III period or earlier, and some copies or fragments of known compositions or literary genres have indeed been found in tablets of Neo-Sumerian and Old Sumerian provenance. In addition, some of the first bilingual Sumerian-Akkadian lexical lists are preserved from that time (although the lists were still usually monolingual and Akkadian translations did not become common until the late Middle Babylonian period) and there are also grammatical texts - essentially bilingual paradigms listing Sumerian grammatical forms and their postulated Akkadian equivalents.

After the Old Babylonian period or, according to some, as early as 1700 BC, the active use of Sumerian declined. Scribes did continue to produce texts in Sumerian at a more modest scale, but generally with interlinear Akkadian translations and only part of the literature known in the Old Babylonian period continued to be copied after its end around 1600 BC. During the Middle Babylonian period, approximately from 1600 to 1000 BC, the Kassite rulers continued to use Sumerian in many of their inscriptions, but Akkadian seems to have taken the place of Sumerian as the primary language of texts used for the training of scribes and their Sumerian itself acquires an increasingly artificial and Akkadian-influenced form. In some cases a text may not even have been meant to be read in Sumerian; instead, it may have functioned as a prestigious way of "encoding" Akkadian via Sumerograms (cf. Japanese kanbun). Nonetheless, the study of Sumerian and copying of Sumerian texts remained an integral part of scribal education and literary culture of Mesopotamia and surrounding societies influenced by it and it retained that role until the eclipse of the tradition of cuneiform literacy itself in the beginning of the Common Era. The most popular genres for Sumerian texts after the Old Babylonian period were incantations, liturgical texts and proverbs; among longer texts, the classics Lugal-e and An-gim were most commonly copied.

Of the 29 royal inscriptions of the late second millennium BC 2nd dynasty of Isin about half were in Sumerian, described as "hypersophisticated classroom Sumerian".

Classification

Sumerian is a language isolate. At one time[when?] it was widely held to be an Indo-European language, but that view has been almost universally rejected. Since decipherment began in the early 20th century, scholars have tried to relate Sumerian to a wide variety of languages. Because of its prestige as the first attested written language, proposals for linguistic affinity often have a nationalistic flavour. Attempts have been made without success to link Sumerian with a range of widely disparate groups such as Indo-European, Austroasiatic,Dravidian,Uralic,). Sino-Tibetan, and Turkic (the last being promoted by Turkish nationalists as part of the Sun language theory). Additionally, long-range proposals have attempted to include Sumerian in broad macrofamilies, often including other notable isolates like Basque or small families like Koreanic. Such proposals enjoy virtually no support among modern linguists, Sumerologists, and Assyriologists, and are typically seen as fringe theories due to their unverifiability.

It has also been suggested that the Sumerian language descended from a late prehistoric creole language. However, no conclusive evidence beyond a handful of typological features can be found to support this view. A more widespread hypothesis posits a Proto-Euphratean language family that preceded Sumerian in Mesopotamia and exerted an areal influence on it, especially in the form of polysyllabic words that appear "un-Sumerian"โ€”making them suspect of being loanwordsโ€”and are not traceable to any other known language family. There is little speculation as to the affinities of this hypothetical substratum language, or these languages, and it is thus best treated as unclassified. Other researchers disagree with the assumption of a single substratum language and argue that several languages are involved. A related proposal by Gordon Whittaker is that the language of the proto-literary texts from the Late Uruk period (c. 3350โ€“3100 BC) is really an early extinct branch of Indo-European language which he terms "Euphratic" which somehow emerged long prior to the accepted timeline for the spread of Indo-European into West Asia, though this is rejected by mainstream opinion which accepts Sumerian as a language isolate.

Writing system

Development

image
Letter sent by the high-priest Lu'enna to the king of Lagash (maybe Urukagina), informing him of his son's death in combat, c.โ€‰2400ย BC, found in Telloh (ancient Girsu)
image
Vase of Entemena, king of Lagash, with dedication. Louvre AO2674, c.โ€‰2400ย BC

Pictographic proto-writing was used starting in c. 3300 BC. It is unclear what underlying language it encoded, if any. By c. 2800 BC, some tablets began using syllabic elements that clearly indicated a relation to the Sumerian language. Around 2600 BC, cuneiform symbols were developed using a wedge-shaped stylus to impress the shapes into wet clay. This cuneiform ("wedge-shaped") mode of writing co-existed with the proto-cuneiform archaic mode. Deimel (1922) lists 870 signs used in the Early Dynastic IIIa period (26th century). In the same period the large set of logographic signs had been simplified into a logosyllabic script comprising several hundred signs. Rosengarten (1967) lists 468 signs used in Sumerian (pre-Sargonian) Lagash.

The cuneiform script was adapted to Akkadian writing beginning in the mid-third millennium. Over the long period of bi-lingual overlap of active Sumerian and Akkadian usage the two languages influenced each other, as reflected in numerous loanwords and even word order changes.

Transliteration

Depending on the context, a cuneiform sign can be read either as one of several possible logograms, each of which corresponds to a word in the Sumerian spoken language, as a phonetic syllable (V, VC, CV, or CVC), or as a determinative (a marker of semantic category, such as occupation or place). (See the article Cuneiform.) Some Sumerian logograms were written with multiple cuneiform signs. These logograms are called diri-spellings, after the logogram ๐’‹›๐’€€ DIRI which is written with the signs ๐’‹› SI and ๐’€€ A. The text transliteration of a tablet will show just the logogram, such as the word dirig, not the separate component signs.

Not all epigraphists are equally reliable, and before publication of an important treatment of a text, scholars will often arrange to collate the published transliteration against the actual tablet, to see if any signs, especially broken or damaged signs, should be represented differently.

Our knowledge of the readings of Sumerian signs is based, to a great extent, on lexical lists made for Akkadian speakers, where they are expressed by means of syllabic signs. The established readings were originally based on lexical lists from the Neo-Babylonian Period, which were found in the 19th century; in the 20th century, earlier lists from the Old Babylonian Period were published and some researchers in the 21st century have switched to using readings from them. There is also variation in the degree to which so-called "Auslauts" or "amissable consonants" (morpheme-final consonants that stopped being pronounced at one point or another in the history of Sumerian) are reflected in the transliterations. This article generally used the versions with expressed Auslauts.

Historiography

Sumero-Akkadian cuneiform syllabary
image
image
Left: Sumero-Akkadian cuneiform syllabary, used by early Akkadian rulers. Right: Seal of Akkadian Empire ruler Naram-Sin (reversed for readability), c.โ€‰2250ย BC. The name of Naram-Sin (Akkadian: ๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ๐’Š๐’„ ๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’ช: DNa-ra-am DSรฎn, Sรฎn being written ๐’‚—๐’ช EN.ZU), appears vertically in the right column. British Museum.

The key to reading logosyllabic cuneiform came from the Behistun inscription, a trilingual cuneiform inscription written in Old Persian, Elamite and Akkadian. (In a similar manner, the key to understanding Egyptian hieroglyphs was the bilingual [Greek and Egyptian with the Egyptian text in two scripts] Rosetta stone and Jean-Franรงois Champollion's transcription in 1822.)

In 1838 Henry Rawlinson, building on the 1802 work of Georg Friedrich Grotefend, was able to decipher the Old Persian section of the Behistun inscriptions, using his knowledge of modern Persian. When he recovered the rest of the text in 1843, he and others were gradually able to translate the Elamite and Akkadian sections of it, starting with the 37 signs he had deciphered for the Old Persian. Meanwhile, many more cuneiform texts were coming to light from archaeological excavations, mostly in the Semitic Akkadian language, which were duly deciphered.

By 1850, however, Edward Hincks came to suspect a non-Semitic origin for cuneiform. Semitic languages are structured according to consonantal forms, whereas cuneiform, when functioning phonetically, was a syllabary, binding consonants to particular vowels. Furthermore, no Semitic words could be found to explain the syllabic values given to particular signs.Julius Oppert suggested that a non-Semitic language had preceded Akkadian in Mesopotamia, and that speakers of this language had developed the cuneiform script.

In 1855 Rawlinson announced the discovery of non-Semitic inscriptions at the southern Babylonian sites of Nippur, Larsa, and Uruk.

In 1856, Hincks argued that the untranslated language was agglutinative in character. The language was called "Scythic" by some, and, confusingly, "Akkadian" by others. In 1869, Oppert proposed the name "Sumerian", based on the known title "King of Sumer and Akkad", reasoning that if Akkad signified the Semitic portion of the kingdom, Sumer might describe the non-Semitic annex.

Credit for being first to scientifically treat a bilingual Sumerian-Akkadian text belongs to Paul Haupt, who published Die sumerischen Familiengesetze (The Sumerian family laws) in 1879.

Ernest de Sarzec began excavating the Sumerian site of Tello (ancient Girsu, capital of the state of Lagash) in 1877, and published the first part of Dรฉcouvertes en Chaldรฉe with transcriptions of Sumerian tablets in 1884. The University of Pennsylvania began excavating Sumerian Nippur in 1888.

A Classified List of Sumerian Ideographs by R. Brรผnnow appeared in 1889.

The bewildering number and variety of phonetic values that signs could have in Sumerian led to a detour in understanding the language โ€“ a Paris-based orientalist, Joseph Halรฉvy, argued from 1874 onward that Sumerian was not a natural language, but rather a secret code (a cryptolect), and for over a decade the leading Assyriologists battled over this issue. For a dozen years, starting in 1885, Friedrich Delitzsch accepted Halรฉvy's arguments, not renouncing Halรฉvy until 1897.

Franรงois Thureau-Dangin working at the Louvre in Paris also made significant contributions to deciphering Sumerian with publications from 1898 to 1938, such as his 1905 publication of Les inscriptions de Sumer et d'Akkad. Charles Fossey at the Collรจge de France in Paris was another prolific and reliable scholar. His pioneering Contribution au Dictionnaire sumรฉrienโ€“assyrien, Paris 1905โ€“1907, turns out to provide the foundation for P. Anton Deimel's 1934 Sumerisch-Akkadisches Glossar (vol. III of Deimel's 4-volume Sumerisches Lexikon).

In 1908, Stephen Herbert Langdon summarized the rapid expansion in knowledge of Sumerian and Akkadian vocabulary in the pages of Babyloniaca, a journal edited by Charles Virolleaud, in an article "Sumerian-Assyrian Vocabularies", which reviewed a valuable new book on rare logograms by Bruno Meissner. Subsequent scholars have found Langdon's work, including his tablet transcriptions, to be not entirely reliable.

In 1944, the Sumerologist Samuel Noah Kramer provided a detailed and readable summary of the decipherment of Sumerian in his Sumerian Mythology.

Friedrich Delitzsch published a learned Sumerian dictionary and grammar in the form of his Sumerisches Glossar and Grundzรผge der sumerischen Grammatik, both appearing in 1914. Delitzsch's student, Arno Poebel, published a grammar with the same title, Grundzรผge der sumerischen Grammatik, in 1923, and for 50 years it would be the standard for students studying Sumerian. Another highly influential figure in Sumerology during much of the 20th century was Adam Falkenstein, who produced a grammar of the language of Gudea's inscriptions. Poebel's grammar was finally superseded in 1984 on the publication of The Sumerian Language: An Introduction to its History and Grammatical Structure, by . While there are various points in Sumerian grammar on which Thomsen's views are not shared by most Sumerologists today, Thomsen's grammar (often with express mention of the critiques put forward by Pascal Attinger in his 1993 Elรฉments de linguistique sumรฉrienne: La construction de du11/e/di 'dire') is the starting point of most recent academic discussions of Sumerian grammar.

More recent monograph-length grammars of Sumerian include Dietz Otto Edzard's 2003 Sumerian Grammar and Bram Jagersma's 2010 A Descriptive Grammar of Sumerian (currently digital, but soon[when?] to be printed in revised form by Oxford University Press). Piotr Michalowski's essay (entitled, simply, "Sumerian") in the 2004 The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World's Ancient Languages has also been recognized as a good modern grammatical sketch.

There is relatively little consensus, even among reasonable Sumerologists, in comparison to the state of most modern or classical languages. Verbal morphology, in particular, is hotly disputed. In addition to the general grammars, there are many monographs and articles about particular areas of Sumerian grammar, without which a survey of the field could not be considered complete.

The primary institutional lexical effort in Sumerian is the Pennsylvania Sumerian Dictionary project, begun in 1974. In 2004, the PSD was released on the Web as the ePSD. The project is currently supervised by Steve Tinney. It has not been updated online since 2006, but Tinney and colleagues are working on a new edition of the ePSD, a working draft of which is available online.

Phonology

Assumed phonological and morphological forms will be between slashes // and curly brackets {}, respectively, with plain text used for the standard Assyriological transcription of Sumerian. Most of the following examples are unattested. Note also that, not unlike most other pre-modern orthographies, Sumerian cuneiform spelling is highly variable, so the transcriptions and the cuneiform examples will generally show only one or at most a few common graphic forms out of many that may occur. Spelling practices have also changed significantly in the course of the history of Sumerian: the examples in the article will use the most phonetically explicit spellings attested, which usually means Old Babylonian or Ur III period spellings. except where an authentic example from another period is used.

Modern knowledge of Sumerian phonology is flawed and incomplete because of the lack of speakers, the transmission through the filter of Akkadian phonology and the difficulties posed by the cuneiform script. As I. M. Diakonoff observes, "when we try to find out the morphophonological structure of the Sumerian language, we must constantly bear in mind that we are not dealing with a language directly but are reconstructing it from a very imperfect mnemonic writing system which had not been basically aimed at the rendering of morphophonemics".

Consonants

Early Sumerian is conjectured to have had at least the consonants listed in the table below. The consonants in parentheses are reconstructed by some scholars based on indirect evidence; if they existed, they were lost around the Ur III period in the late 3rd millennium BC.

Sumerian consonant phonemes
Bilabial Alveolar Postalveolar Velar Glottal
Nasal m โŸจmโŸฉ n โŸจnโŸฉ ล‹ โŸจgฬƒโŸฉ
Plosive plain p โŸจbโŸฉ t โŸจdโŸฉ k โŸจgโŸฉ (ส”)
aspirated pสฐ โŸจpโŸฉ tสฐ โŸจtโŸฉ kสฐ โŸจkโŸฉ
Fricative s โŸจsโŸฉ สƒ โŸจลกโŸฉ x โŸจแธซ~hโŸฉ (h)
Affricate plain tอกs โŸจzโŸฉ
aspirated tอกsสฐ? โŸจล™~drโŸฉ
Approximant l โŸจlโŸฉ (j)
Tap ษพ โŸจrโŸฉ
  • a simple distribution of six stop consonants in three places of articulation, originally distinguished by aspiration. In the late 3rd millennium BC, the unaspirated stops are thought to have become voiced in most positions (although not word-finally), whereas the voiceless aspirated stops maintained their aspiration.
    • p (voiceless aspirated bilabial plosive),
    • t (voiceless aspirated alveolar plosive),
    • k (voiceless aspirated velar plosive),
      • As a rule, the voiceless aspirated consonants (p, t and k) did not occur word-finally.
    • b (voiceless unaspirated bilabial plosive), later voiced;
    • d (voiceless unaspirated alveolar plosive), later voiced;
    • g (voiceless unaspirated velar plosive), later voiced.
  • a phoneme usually represented by ล™ (sometimes written dr), which became /d/ or /r/ in northern and southern dialects, respectively, after the Old Akkadian period. It was first reconstructed as a voiced alveolar tap /ษพ/, but Bram Jagersma argues that it was a voiceless aspirated alveolar affricate because of its reflection in loanwords in Akkadian, among other reasons, and this view is accepted by Gรกbor Zรณlyomi (2017: 28). Other suggestions that have been made is that ล™ was a voiceless alveolar tap .
  • a simple distribution of three nasal consonants in similar distribution to the stops:
    • m (bilabial nasal),
    • n (alveolar nasal),
    • gฬƒ (frequently printed ฤ due to typesetting constraints, increasingly transcribed as ล‹) /ล‹/ (likely a velar nasal, as in sing, it has also been argued to be a labiovelar nasal [ล‹สท] or a nasalized labiovelar).
  • a set of three sibilants:
    • s , likely a voiceless alveolar fricative,
    • z, likely a voiceless unaspirated alveolar affricate, /tอกs/, as shown by Akkadian loans from /s/=[tอกs] to Sumerian /z/. In early Sumerian, this would have been the unaspirated counterpart to ล™. Like the stop series b, d and g, it is thought to have become voiced /dz/ in some positions in the late 3rd millennium.
    • ลก (generally described as a voiceless postalveolar fricative, /สƒ/, as in ship
  • แธซ (a velar fricative, /x/, sometimes written <h>)
  • two liquid consonants:
    • l (a lateral consonant)
    • r (a rhotic consonant), which Jagersma argues was realized as a tap [ษพ] because of various evidence suggesting its phonetic similarity to /t/ and /d/.

The existence of various other consonants has been hypothesized based on graphic alternations and loans, though none have found wide acceptance. For example, Diakonoff lists evidence for two lateral phonemes, two rhotics, two back fricatives, and two g-sounds (excluding the velar nasal), and assumes a phonemic difference between consonants that are dropped word-finally (such as the g in ๐’  zag > za3) and consonants that remain (such as the g in ๐’†ท๐’€ lag). Other "hidden" consonant phonemes that have been suggested include semivowels such as /j/ and /w/, and a glottal fricative /h/ or a glottal stop that could explain the absence of vowel contraction in some wordsโ€”though objections have been raised against that as well. A recent descriptive grammar by Bram Jagersma includes /j/, /h/, and /ส”/ as unwritten consonants, with the glottal stop even serving as the first-person pronominal prefix. However, these unwritten consonants had been lost by the Ur III period according to Jagersma.

Very often, a word-final consonant was not expressed in writingโ€”and was possibly omitted in pronunciationโ€”so it surfaced only when followed by a vowel: for example the /k/ of the genitive case ending -ak does not appear in ๐’‚๐’ˆ—๐’†ท e2 lugal-la "the king's house", but it becomes obvious in ๐’‚๐’ˆ—๐’†ท๐’„ฐ e2 lugal-la-kam "(it) is the king's house" (compare liaison in French). Jagersma believes that the lack of expression of word-final consonants was originally mostly a graphic convention, but that in the late 3rd millennium voiceless aspirated stops and affricates (/pสฐ/, /tสฐ/, /kสฐ/ and /tsสฐ/ were, indeed, gradually lost in syllable-final position, as were the unaspirated stops /d/ and /ษก/.

Vowels

The vowels that are clearly distinguished by the cuneiform script are /a/, /e/, /i/, and /u/. Various researchers have posited the existence of more vowel phonemes such as /o/ and even /ษ›/ and /ษ”/, which would have been concealed by the transmission through Akkadian, as that language does not distinguish them. That would explain the seeming existence of numerous homophones in transliterated Sumerian, as well as some details of the phenomena mentioned in the next paragraph. These hypotheses are not yet generally accepted. Phonemic vowel length has also been posited by many scholars based on vowel length in Sumerian loanwords in Akkadian, occasional so-called plene spellings with extra vowel signs, and some internal evidence from alternations. However, scholars who believe in the existence of phonemic vowel length do not consider it possible to reconstruct the length of the vowels in most Sumerian words.

During the Old Sumerian period, the southern dialects (those used in the cities of Lagash, Umma, Ur and Uruk), which also provide the overwhelming majority of material from that stage, exhibited a vowel harmony rule based on vowel height or advanced tongue root. Essentially, prefixes containing /e/ or /i/ appear to alternate between /e/ in front of syllables containing open vowels and /i/ in front of syllables containing close vowels; e.g. ๐’‚Š๐’ฝ e-kaลก4 "he runs", but ๐’‰Œ๐’บ i3-gub "he stands". Certain verbs with stem vowels spelt with /u/ and /e/, however, seem to take prefixes with a vowel quality opposite to the one that would have been expected according to this rule, which has been variously interpreted as an indication either of the existence of additional vowel phonemes in Sumerian or simply of incorrectly reconstructed readings of individual lexemes. The 3rd person plural dimensional prefix ๐’‰ˆ -ne- is also unaffected, which Jagersma believes to be caused by the length of its vowel. In addition, some have argued for a second vowel harmony rule.

There also appear to be many cases of partial or complete assimilation of the vowel of certain prefixes and suffixes to one in the adjacent syllable reflected in writing in some of the later periods, and there is a noticeable, albeit not absolute, tendency for disyllabic stems to have the same vowel in both syllables. These patterns, too, are interpreted as evidence for a richer vowel inventory by some researchers. For example, we find forms like ๐’‚ต๐’ฝ ga-kaลก4 "let me run", but, from the Neo-Sumerian period onwards, occasional spellings like ๐’„˜๐’ˆฌ๐’Š๐’€Š๐’‹ง gu2-mu-ra-ab-ลกum2 "let me give it to you". According to Jagersma, these assimilations are limited to open syllables and, as with vowel harmony, Jagersma interprets their absence as the result of vowel length or of stress in at least some cases. There is evidence of various cases of elision of vowels, apparently in unstressed syllables; in particular an initial vowel in a word of more than two syllables seems to have been elided in many cases. What appears to be vowel contraction in hiatus (*/aa/, */ia/, */ua/ > a, */ae/ > a, */ie/ > i or e, */ue/ > u or e, etc.) is also very common. There is some uncertainty and variance of opinion as to whether the result in each specific case is a long vowel or whether a vowel is simply replaced/deleted.

Syllables could have any of the following structures: V, CV, VC, CVC. More complex syllables, if Sumerian had them, are not expressed as such by the cuneiform script.

Stress

Sumerian stress is usually presumed to have been dynamic, since it seems to have caused vowel elisions on many occasions. Opinions vary on its placement. As argued by Bram Jagersma and confirmed by other scholars, the adaptation of Akkadian words of Sumerian origin seems to suggest that Sumerian stress tended to be on the last syllable of the word, at least in its citation form. The treatment of forms with grammatical morphemes is less clear. Many cases of apheresis in forms with enclitics have been interpreted as entailing that the same rule was true of the phonological word on many occasions, i.e. that the stress could be shifted onto the enclitics; however, the fact that many of these same enclitics have allomorphs with apocopated final vowels (e.g. /โ€‘ลกe/ ~ /-ลก/) suggests that they were, on the contrary, unstressed when these allomorphs arose. It has also been conjectured that the frequent assimilation of the vowels of non-final syllables to the vowel of the final syllable of the word may be due to stress on it. However, a number of suffixes and enclitics consisting of /e/ or beginning in /e/ are also assimilated and reduced.

In earlier scholarship, somewhat different views were expressed and attempts were made to formulate detailed rules for the effect of grammatical morphemes and compounding on stress, but with inconclusive results. Based predominantly on patterns of vowel elision, Adam Falkenstein argued that stress in monomorphemic words tended to be on the first syllable, and that the same applied without exception to reduplicated stems, but that the stress shifted onto the last syllable in a first member of a compound or idiomatic phrase, onto the syllable preceding a (final) suffix/enclitic, and onto the first syllable of the possessive enclitic /-ani/. In his view, single verbal prefixes were unstressed, but longer sequences of verbal prefixes attracted the stress to their first syllable. Jagersma has objected that many of Falkenstein's examples of elision are medial and so, while the stress was obviously not on the medial syllable in question, the examples do not show where it was.

Joachim Krecher attempted to find more clues in texts written phonetically by assuming that geminations, plene spellings and unexpected "stronger" consonant qualities were clues to stress placement. Using this method, he confirmed Falkenstein's views that reduplicated forms were stressed on the first syllable and that there was generally stress on the syllable preceding a (final) suffix/enclitic, on the penultimate syllable of a polysyllabic enclitic such as -/ani/, -/zunene/ etc., on the last syllable of the first member of a compound, and on the first syllable in a sequence of verbal prefixes. However, he found that single verbal prefixes received the stress just as prefix sequences did, and that in most of the above cases, another stress often seemed to be present as well: on the stem to which the suffixes/enclitics were added, on the second compound member in compounds, and possibly on the verbal stem that prefixes were added to or on following syllables. He also did not agree that the stress of monomorphemic words was typically initial and believed to have found evidence of words with initial as well as with final stress; in fact, he did not even exclude the possibility that stress was normally stem-final.

Pascal Attinger has partly concurred with Krecher, but doubts that the stress was always on the syllable preceding a suffix/enclitic and argues that in a prefix sequence, the stressed syllable wasn't the first one, but rather the last one if heavy and the next-to-the-last one in other cases. Attinger has also remarked that the patterns observed may be the result of Akkadian influence - either due to linguistic convergence while Sumerian was still a living language or, since the data comes from the Old Babylonian period, a feature of Sumerian as pronounced by native speakers of Akkadian. The latter has also been pointed out by Jagersma, who is, in addition, sceptical about the very assumptions underlying the method used by Krecher to establish the place of stress.

Orthography

Sumerian writing expressed pronunciation only roughly. It was often morphophonemic, so much of the allomorphic variation could be ignored. Especially in earlier Sumerian, coda consonants were also often ignored in spelling; e.g. /mungฬƒareลก/ 'they put it here' could be written ๐’ˆฌ๐’ƒป๐’Œท mu-gฬƒar-re2. The use of VC signs for that purpose, producing more elaborate spellings such as ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ƒป๐’Œท๐’Œ mu-un-gฬƒar-re2-eลก3, became more common only in the Neo-Sumerian and especially in the Old Babylonian period.

Conversely, an intervocalic consonant, especially at the end of a morpheme followed by a vowel-initial morpheme, was usually "repeated" by the use of a CV sign for the same consonant; e.g. ๐’Šฌ sar "write" - ๐’Šฌ๐’Š sar-ra "written". This results in orthographic gemination that is usually reflected in Sumerological transliteration, but does not actually designate any phonological phenomenon such as length. It is also relevant in this context that, as explained above, many morpheme-final consonants seem to have been elided unless followed by a vowel at various stages in the history of Sumerian. These are traditionally termed Auslauts in Sumerology and may or may not be expressed in transliteration: e.g. the logogram ๐’Šฎ for /ลกag/ > /ลกa(g)/ "heart" may be transliterated as ลกag4 or as ลกa3. Thus, when the following consonant appears in front of a vowel, it can be said to be expressed only by the next sign: for example, ๐’Šฎ๐’‚ต ลกag4-ga "in the heart" can also be interpreted as ลกa3-ga.

Of course, when a CVC sound sequence is expressed by a sequence of signs with the sound values CV-VC, that does not necessarily indicate a long vowel or a sequence of identical vowels either. To mark such a thing, so-called "plene" writings with an additional vowel sign repeating the preceding vowel were used, although that never came to be done systematically. A typical plene writing involved a sequence such as (C)V-V(-VC/CV), e.g. ๐’‚ผ๐’€€ ama-a for /amaa/ < {ama-e} "the mother (ergative case)").

Sumerian texts vary in the degree to which they use logograms or opt for syllabic (phonetic) spellings instead: e.g. the word ๐’ƒป gฬƒar "put" may also be written phonetically as ๐’‚ท๐’…ˆ gฬƒa2-ar. They also vary in the degree to which allomorphic variation was expressed, e.g. ๐’€๐’„„๐’Œ ba-gi4-eลก or ๐’€๐’„„๐’…– ba-gi4-iลก for "they returned". While early Sumerian writing was highly logographic, there was a tendency towards more phonetic spelling in the Neo-Sumerian period. Consistent syllabic spelling was employed when writing down the Emesal dialect (since the usual logograms would have been read in Emegir by default), for the purpose of teaching the language and often in recording incantations.

As already mentioned, texts written in the Archaic Sumerian period are difficult to interpret, because they often omit grammatical elements and determinatives. In addition, many literary-mythological texts from that period use a special orthographic style called UD.GAL.NUN, which seems to be based on substitution of certain signs or groups of signs for others. For example, the three signs ๐’Œ“ UD, ๐’ƒฒ GAL and ๐’‰ฃ NUN, which the system is named for, are substituted for ๐’€ญ AN, ๐’‚— EN, and ๐’†ค LIL2 respectively, producing the name of the god den-lil2. The motivation for this practice is mysterious; it has been suggested that it was a kind of cryptography. Texts written in UD.GAL.NUN are still understood very poorly and only partially.

Grammar

Ever since its decipherment, research of Sumerian has been made difficult by the relative sparseness of linguistic data, the apparent lack of a closely related language, and the features of the writing system. A further oft-mentioned and paradoxical problem for the study of Sumerian is that the most numerous and varied texts written in the most phonetically explicit and precise orthography are only dated to periods when the scribes themselves were no longer native speakers and often demonstrably had less-than-perfect command of the language they were writing in; conversely, for much of the time during which Sumerian was still a living language, the surviving sources are few, unvaried and/or written in an orthography that is more difficult to interpret.

Typologically, Sumerian is classified as an agglutinative, ergative (consistently so in its nominal morphology and split ergative in its verbal morphology), and subject-object-verb language.

Nominal morphology

Noun phrases

The Sumerian noun is typically a one or two-syllable root (๐’…† igi "eye", ๐’‚ e2 "house, household", ๐’Ž nin "lady"), although there are also some roots with three syllables like ๐’† ๐’‡ด ลกakanka "market". There are two semantically predictable grammatical genders, which have traditionally been called animate and inanimate, although these names do not express their membership exactly, as explained below.

The adjectives and other modifiers follow the noun (๐’ˆ—๐’ˆค lugal maแธซ "great king"). The noun itself is not inflected; rather, grammatical markers attach to the noun phrase as a whole, in a certain order. Typically, that order would be:

noun adjective numeral genitive phrase relative clause possessive marker plural marker case marker

An example may be:

๐’€ญ๐’ƒฒ๐’ƒฒ๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ๐’Š
digฬƒir gal-gal-gฬƒu10-ne-ra

digฬƒir

god

gal-gal-gฬƒu-ene-ra

great-REDUP-1.POSS-PL.AN-DAT

digฬƒir gal-gal-gฬƒu-ene-ra

god great-REDUP-1.POSS-PL.AN-DAT

"for my great gods"

The possessive, plural and case markers are traditionally referred to as "suffixes", but have recently also been described as enclitics or postpositions.

Gender

The two genders have been variously called animate and inanimate,human and non-human, or personal/person and impersonal/non-person. Their assignment is semantically predictable: the first gender includes humans and gods, while the second one includes animals, plants, non-living objects, abstract concepts, and groups of humans. Since the second gender includes animals, the use of the terms animate and inanimate is somewhat misleading and conventional, but it is most common in the literature, so it will be maintained in this article.

There are some minor deviations from the gender assignment rules, for example:

  • The word for ๐’€ฉ alan "statue" may be treated as animate.
  • Words for slaves such as ๐’Šฉ๐’†ณ geme2 "slave woman" and ๐’Š• sagฬƒ "head", used in its secondary sense of "slave", may be treated as inanimate.
  • In fable-like contexts, which occur frequently in Sumerian proverbs, animals are usually treated as animate.
Number

The plural marker proper is (๐’‚Š)๐’‰ˆ /-(e)ne/. It is used only with nouns of the animate gender and its use is optional. It is often omitted when other parts of the clause indicate the plurality of the referent. Thus, it is not used if the noun is modified by a numeral (๐’‡ฝ๐’น๐’น๐’น lu2 eลก5 "three men"). It has also been observed that until the Ur III period, the marker generally isn't used in a noun phrase in the absolutive case, unless this is necessary for disambiguation. Instead, the plurality of the absolutive participant is commonly expressed only by the form of the verb in the clause: e.g. ๐’‡ฝ๐’€๐’€„๐’€„๐’Œ lu2 ba-zaแธซ3-zaแธซ3-eลก "the men ran away", ๐’‡ฝ๐’ˆฌ๐’…‡๐’†ช๐’‰๐’Œ lu2 mu-u3-dab5-be2-eลก "I caught the men". The plural marker is not used when referring to a group of people, because a group of people is treated as inanimate; e.g. ๐’€ณ engar "farmer" with no plural marker may refer to "(the group of) farmers".

As the following example shows, the marker is appended to the end of the phrase, even after a relative clause:

๐’‡ฝ๐’‚๐’€€๐’€๐’†ช๐’€๐’‰ˆ
lu2 e2-a ba-dab5-ba-ne

lu

man

e-a

house-in

ba-dab-a-(e)ne

MID-catch-NMLZ-PL.AN

lu e-a ba-dab-a-(e)ne

man house-in MID-catch-NMLZ-PL.AN

"the men who were caught in the house"

Likewise, the plural marker is usually (albeit not always) added only once when a whole series of coordinated nouns have plural reference:

๐’€ณ๐’‰บ๐’‡ป๐’‹—๐’„ฉ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ
engar sipad ลกu-ku6-e-ne

engar

farmer

sipad

shepherd

ลกukuล™-ene

fisherman-PL.AN

engar sipad ลกukuล™-ene

farmer shepherd fisherman-PL.AN

"farmers, shepherds and fishermen"

Another way in which a kind of plurality is expressed is by means of reduplication of the noun: ๐’€ญ๐’€ญ digฬƒir-digฬƒir "gods", ๐’Œˆ๐’Œˆ ib2-ib2 "hips". However, this construction is usually considered to have a more specialized meaning, variously interpreted as totality ("all the gods", "both of my hips") or distribution/separateness ("each of the gods taken separately"). An especially frequently occurring reduplicated word, ๐’†ณ๐’†ณ kur-kur "foreign lands", may have simply plural meaning, and in very late usage, the meaning of the reduplication in general might be simple plurality.

At least a few adjectives (notably ๐’ƒฒ gal "great" and ๐’Œ‰ tur "small") are also reduplicated when the noun they modify has plural reference: ๐’€€๐’ƒฒ๐’ƒฒ a gal-gal "the great waters". In that case, the noun itself is not reduplicated. This is sometimes interpreted as an expression of simple plurality, while a minority view is that the meaning of these forms is not purely plural, but rather the same as that of noun reduplication.

Two other ways of expressing plurality are characteristic only of very late Sumerian usage and have made their way into Sumerograms used in writing Akkadian and other languages. One is used with inanimate nouns and consists of the modification of the noun with the adjective ๐’„ญ๐’€€ แธซi-a "various" (lit. "mixed"), e.g. ๐’‡ป๐’„ญ๐’€€ udu แธซi-a "sheep". The other is adding the 3rd person plural form of the enclitic copula ๐’ˆจ๐’Œ -me-eลก to a noun (๐’ˆ—๐’ˆจ๐’Œ lugal-me-eลก "kings", originally "they (who) are kings").

Case
Case markers

The generally recognized case markers are:

case ending most common spelling approximate English equivalents and function
absolutive /-ร˜/ intransitive subject or transitive object
ergative /-e/ (primarily with animates) (๐’‚Š -e) transitive subject
directive /-e/ (only with inanimates) (๐’‚Š -e) "in(to) contact with", "at", "upon", "for", "as for"; causee
genitive /-a(k)/, /-(k)/ (๐’€€ -a) "of"
equative /-gin/ ๐’ถ -gen7 "as", "like"
dative /-r(a)/ (only with animates) ๐’Š -ra "to", "for", "upon", causee
terminative /-(e)ลก(e)/ ๐’‚  -ลกe3 "to", "towards", "for", "until", "in exchange (for)", "instead if", "as for", "because of"
comitative /-d(a)/ ๐’• -da "(together) with", "because of (an emotion)"
locative /-a/ (only with inanimates) (๐’€€ -a) "in/into", "on/onto", "about", "by means of", "with (a certain material"
ablative (only with inanimates) /-ta/ ๐’‹ซ -ta "from", "since", "by (means of)", "in addition to"/"with", distributive ("each")

The final vowels of most of the above markers are subject to loss if they are attached to vowel-final words.

In addition, there are the enclitic particles ๐’ˆพ๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ na-an-na meaning "without" and (๐’€€)๐’…—๐’‰† (-a)-ka-nam -/akanam/ (in earlier Sumerian) or (๐’€€)๐’†ค๐’Œ (-a)-ke4-eลก2 -/akeลก/ "because of" (in later Sumerian).

Note that these nominal cases enter interact with the so-called dimensional prefixes of the verb that the noun modifies, producing additional meanings. While the dative and directive are in complementary distribution in the noun, they can nevertheless be distinguished when the verbal prefixes are taken into account. Likewise, whereas the meanings "in(to)" and "on(to)" are expressed by the same nominal case, they can be disambiguated by the verbal prefixes. This is explained in more detail in the section on Dimensional prefixes.

Additional spatial or temporal meanings can be expressed by genitive phrases like "at the head of" = "above", "at the face of" = "in front of", "at the outer side of" = "because of", etc.:

๐’‡๐’‡ป๐’Œ“๐’…—
bar udu แธซad2-ka

bar

outer.side

udu

sheep

แธซad-ak-a

white-GEN-LOC

bar udu แธซad-ak-a

outer.side sheep white-GEN-LOC

"because of a white sheep"

The embedded structure of the noun phrase can be further illustrated with the following phrase:

๐’‰บ๐’‡ป๐’‡ป๐’‹ ๐’…—๐’†ค๐’‰ˆ
sipad udu siki-ka-ke4-ne

sipad

shepherd

udu

sheep

siki-(a)k-ak-ene

wool-GEN-GEN-PL.AN

sipad udu siki-(a)k-ak-ene

shepherd sheep wool-GEN-GEN-PL.AN

"shepherds of woolly sheep"

Here, the first genitive morpheme (-a(k)) subordinates ๐’‹  siki "wool" to ๐’‡ป udu "sheep", and the second subordinates ๐’‡ป๐’‹  udu siki-(a)k "sheep of wool" (or "woolly sheep") to ๐’‰บ๐’‡ป sipad "shepherd".

Case usage

The uses of the ergative and absolutive case are those typical of ergative languages. The subject of an intransitive verb such as "come" is in the same case as the object of a transitive verb such as "build", namely the so-called absolutive case. In contrast, the subject of a transitive verb has a different case, which is termed ergative. This can be illustrated with the following examples:

๐’ˆ—๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’บ
lugal i3-im-gฬƒen

lugal-โˆ…

king-ABS

i-m-gฬƒen

FIN-VEN-come

lugal-โˆ… i-m-gฬƒen

king-ABS FIN-VEN-come

"The king came."

๐’ˆ—๐’‚Š๐’‚๐’…”๐’†•
lugal-e e2 in-du3

lugal-e

king-ERG

e-โˆ…

house-ABS

i-n-du

FIN-3.AN.A-build

lugal-e e-โˆ… i-n-du

king-ERG house-ABS FIN-3.AN.A-build

"The king built a house."

In contrast with the verbal morphology, Sumerian nominal morphology consistently follows this ergative principle regardless of tense/aspect, person and mood.

Besides the general meanings of the case forms outlined above, there are many lexically determined and more or less unpredictable uses of specific cases, often governed by a certain verb in a certain sense:

  • The comitative is used to express:
    • "to run away" (e.g. ๐’€„ zaแธซ3) or to "take away" (e.g. ๐’‹ผ๐’€€ kar) from somebody;
    • ๐’ช zu "to know/learn something from somebody";
    • ๐’ฒ sa2 "to be equal to somebody" (but the same verb uses the directive in the phrasal verb si ...sa2 "be/put something in order", see Phrasal verbs);
    • the meaning "ago" in the construction ๐’ˆฌ๐’•...๐’‹ซ mu-da X-ta "X years ago" (lit. "since X with the years")
  • The directive is used to express:
    • the objects of ๐’ dab6 "surround", ๐’Š raแธซ2 "hit", ๐’‹› si "fill", ๐’‹ณ tag "touch"
    • ๐’ˆญ daแธซ "add something to something"
    • ๐’„„ gi4 in the sense "bring back something to something"
    • ๐’‘ us2 "be next to something, follow something"
    • ๐’…— dug4 "say something about/concerning something" ({b-i-dug} "say something about this" often seems to have very vague reference, approaching the meaning "say something then")
  • The locative with a directive verbal prefix, expressing "on(to)", is used to express:
    • ๐’†• ล™u2 "hold on to something"
    • ๐’„ท๐’ˆฟ sa4 "give (as a name)" to somebody/something
    • ๐’บ tum2 "be fit for something"
  • ๐’‰š sa10 "to barter" governs, in the sense to "to buy", the terminative to introduce the seller from whom something is bought, but in another construction it uses the locative for the thing something is bartered for;
  • ๐’‹พ ti "to approach" governs the dative.

For the government of phrasal verbs, see the relevant section.

Pronouns

The attested personal pronouns are:

independent possessive suffix/enclitic
1st person singular ๐’‚ท(๐’‚Š) gฬƒe26(-e) ๐’ˆฌ -gฬƒu10
2nd person singular ๐’ข ze2, Old Babylonian ๐’๐’‚Š za-e ๐’ช -zu
3rd person singular animate ๐’€€๐’‰ˆ a-ne or ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ e-ne (๐’€€)๐’‰Œ -(a)-ni
3rd person inanimate ๐’‰ -bi
1st person plural (๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— me-en-de3-en?, ๐’ˆจ me?) ๐’ˆจ -me
2nd person plural (๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— me-en-ze2-en?) ๐’ช๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ -zu-ne-ne
3rd person plural animate ๐’€€/๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ a/e-ne-ne ๐’€€/๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ (-a)-ne-ne, ๐’‰ -bi

The stem vowels of ๐’‚ท(๐’‚Š) gฬƒe26(-e) and ๐’‚Š ze2 are assimilated to a following case suffix containing /a/ and then have the forms ๐’‚ท gฬƒa- and ๐’ za-; e.g. ๐’๐’Š za-ra 'to you (sg.)'.

As far as demonstrative pronouns are concerned, Sumerian most commonly uses the enclitic ๐’‰ -bi to express the meaning "this". There are rare instances of other demonstrative enclitics such as ๐’‚Š -e "this", ๐’Šบ -ลกe "that" and ๐’Š‘ -re "that". The difference between the three has been explained in terms of increasing distance from the speaker or as a difference between proximity to the speaker, proximity to the listener and distance from both, akin to the Japanese or Latin three-term demonstrative system. The independent demonstrative pronouns are ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚—/๐’‰ˆ๐’‚Š ne-e(n) "this (thing)" and ๐’„ฏ ur5 "that (thing)";-ne(n) might also be used as another enclitic. "Now" is ๐’‰Œ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚  i3-ne-eลก2 or ๐’€€๐’•๐’€  a-da-al. For "then" and "there", the declined noun phrases ๐’Œ“๐’€ ud-ba "at that time" and ๐’† ๐’€ ki-ba "at that place" are used; "so" is ๐’„ฏ๐’ถ ur5-gen7, lit. "like that".

The interrogative pronouns are ๐’€€๐’€ a-ba "who" and ๐’€€๐’ˆพ a-na "what" (also used as "whoever" and "whatever" when introducing dependent clauses). The stem for "where" is ๐’ˆจ me- (used in the locative, terminative and ablative to express "where", "whither" and "whence", respectively) . "When" is ๐’‡ท/๐’‚— en3/en, but also the stem ๐’ˆจ(๐’‚Š)๐’ˆพ me-(e)-na is attested for "when" (in the emphatic form me-na-am3 and in the terminative me-na-ลกe3 "until when?", "how long?"). "How" and "why" are expressed by ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’€ธ a-na-aลก (lit. "what for?") and ๐’€€๐’ถ a-gen7 "how" (an equative case form, perhaps "like what?"). The expected form ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’ถ a-na-gen7 is used in Old Babylonian.

An indefinite pronoun is ๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ na-me "any", which is only attested in attributive function until the Old Babylonian period, but may also stand alone in the sense "anyone, anything" in late texts. It can be added to nouns to produce further expressions with pronominal meaning such as ๐’‡ฝ๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ lu2 na-me "anyone", ๐’ƒป๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ nigฬƒ2 na-me "anything", ๐’† ๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ ki na-me "anywhere", ๐’Œ“๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ ud4 na-me "ever, any time". The nouns ๐’‡ฝ lu2 "man" and ๐’ƒป nigฬƒ2 "thing" are also used for "someone, anyone" and "something, anything". With negation, all of these expressions naturally acquire the meanings "nobody", "nothing", "nowhere" and "never".

The reflexive pronoun is ๐’…Ž(๐’‹ผ) ni2(-te) "self", which generally occurs with possessive pronouns attached: ๐’…Ž๐’ˆฌ ni2-gฬƒu10 "my-self", etc. The longer form appears in the third person animate (๐’…Ž๐’‹ผ๐’‰Œ ni2-te-ni "him/herself", ๐’…Ž๐’‹ผ๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ ni2-te-ne-ne "themselves").

Adjectives

It is controversial whether Sumerian has adjectives at all, since nearly all stems with adjectival meaning are also attested as verb stems and may be conjugated as verbs: ๐’ˆค maแธซ "great" > ๐’Ž๐’€ ๐’ˆค nin al-maแธซ "the lady is great". Jagersma believes that there is a distinction in that the few true adjectives cannot be negated, and a few stems are different depending on the part of speech: ๐’ƒฒ gal "big", but ๐’„–๐’ŒŒ gu-ul "be big". Furthermore, stems with adjective-like meaning sometimes occur with the nominalizing suffix /-a/, but their behaviour varies in this respect. Some stems appear to require the suffix always: e.g. ๐’†—๐’‚ต kalag-ga "mighty", ๐’Šท๐’‚ต sag9-ga "beautiful", ๐’๐’• gid2-da "long" (these are verbs with adjectival meaning according to Jagersma). Some never take the suffix: e.g. ๐’ƒฒ gal "big", ๐’Œ‰ tur "small" and ๐’ˆค maแธซ "great" (these are genuine adjectives according to Jagersma). Finally, some alternate: ๐’ฃ zid "right" often occurs as ๐’ฃ๐’• zid-da (these are pairs of adjectives and verbs derived from them, respectively, according to Jagersma). In the latter case, attempts have been made to find a difference of meaning between the forms with and without -a; it has been suggested that the form with -a expresses a kind of determination, e.g. zid "righteous, true" vs zid-da "right (not left)", or restrictiveness, e.g. ๐’‚๐’‰‹ e2 gibil "a new house" vs ๐’‚๐’‰‹๐’†ท e2 gibil-la "the new house (as contrasted with the old one)", "a/the newer (kind of) house" or "the newest house", as well as nominalization, e.g. tur-ra "a/the small one" or "a small thing". Other scholars have remained sceptical about the posited contrasts.

A few adjectives, like ๐’ƒฒ gal "big" and ๐’Œ‰ tur "small" appear to "agree in number" with a preceding noun in the plural by reduplication; with some other adjectives, the meaning seems to be "each of them ADJ". The colour term ๐’Œ“(๐’Œ“) bar6-bar6 / babbar "white" appears to have always been reduplicated, and the same may be true of ๐’ˆช gig2 (actually giggig) "black".

To express the comparative or superlative degree, various constructions with the word ๐’‹›๐’€€ dirig "exceed"/"excess" are used: X + locative + dirig-ga "which exceeds (all) X", dirig + X + genitive + terminative "exceeding X", lit. "to the excess of X".

Adverbs and adverbial expressions

Most commonly, adverbial meanings are expressed by noun phrases in a certain case, e.g. ๐’Œ“ ud-ba "then", lit. "at that time".

There are two main ways to form an adverb of manner:

  • There is a dedicated adverbiative suffix ๐’‚  -eลก2, which can be used to derive adverbs from both adjectives and nouns: ๐’ฃ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚  zid-de3-eลก2 "rightly", "in the right way", ๐’†ฐ๐’‚  numun-eลก2 'as seeds', 'in the manner of seeds'.
  • the enclitic ๐’‰ -bi can be added to an adjectival stem: ๐’‰‹๐’‰ gibil-bi "newly". This, too, is interpreted by Jagersma as a deadjectival noun with a possessive clitic in the directive case: {gibil.โˆ….bi-e}, lit. "at its newness".

For pronominal adverbs, see the section on Pronouns.

Numerals

Sumerian has a combination decimal and sexagesimal system (for example, 600 is 'ten sixties'), so that the Sumerian lexical numeral system is sexagesimal with 10 as a subbase. The cardinal numerals and ways of forming composite numbers are as follows:

number name explanation notes cuneiform sign
1 diลก/deลก (aลก, dili) ๐’น (๐’€ธ)
2 min ๐’ˆซ
3 eลก5 ๐’ˆ, ๐’Œ
4 limmu ๐’‡น, ๐’‰, ๐’ผ
5 ia2/i2 ๐’Š
6 aลก ia2 "five" + aลก "one" ๐’‹
7 imin/umun5/umin ia2 "five" + min "two" ๐’…“
8 ussu ๐’‘„
9 ilimmu ia2/i2 (5) + limmu (4) ๐’‘†
10 u ๐’Œ‹
11 u-diลก (?) ๐’Œ‹๐’น
20 niลก ๐’Œ‹๐’Œ‹
30 uลกu3 ๐’Œ‹๐’Œ‹๐’Œ‹
40 nimin "less two [tens]" ๐’
50 ninnu "less ten" ๐’
60 gฬƒeลก2(d) ๐’•, ๐’‘
120 gฬƒeลก2(d)-min "two gฬƒeลก2(d)" ๐’•๐’ˆซ
240 gฬƒeลก2(d)-limmu "four gฬƒeลก2(d)" ๐’•๐’
420 gฬƒeลก2(d)-imin "seven gฬƒeลก(d)" ๐’•๐’…“
600 gฬƒeลก2(d)-u "ten gฬƒeลก(d)" ๐’ž
1000 li-mu-um borrowed from Akkadian ๐’‡ท๐’ˆฌ๐’Œ
1200 gฬƒeลก2(d)-u-min "two gฬƒeลก2(d)-u" ๐’ž๐’ˆซ
3600 ลกar2 "totality" ๐’Šน or ๐’„ญ
36000 ลกar2-u "ten totalities" ๐’ฌ
216000 ลกar2 gal "a big totality" ๐’Šน๐’ƒฒ or ๐’„ญ๐’ƒฒ

Ordinal numerals are formed with the suffix ๐’„ฐ๐’ˆ  -kam-ma in Old Sumerian and ๐’„ฐ(๐’ˆ ) -kam(-ma) (with the final vowel still surfacing in front of enclitics) in subsequent periods. However, a cardinal numeral may also have ordinal meaning sometimes.

The syntax of numerals has some peculiarities. Besides just being placed after a noun like other modifiers (๐’Œ‰๐’ˆ dumu eลก5 "three children" - which may, however, also be written ๐’ˆ๐’Œ‰ 3 dumu), the numeral may be reinforced by the copula (๐’Œ‰๐’ˆ๐’€€๐’€ญ dumu eลก5-am3, lit. "the children, being three". Finally, there is a third construction in which the possessive pronoun ๐’‰ -bi is added after the numeral, which gives the whole phrase a definite meaning: ๐’Œ‰๐’ˆ๐’€€๐’‰ dumu eลก5-a-bi: "the three children" (lit. "children - the three of them"). The numerals ๐’ˆซ min "two" and ๐’ˆ eลก5 "three" are also supplied with the nominalizing marker -a before the pronoun, as the above example shows.

Fractions are formed with the phrase ๐’…†...N...๐’…… igi-N-gฬƒal2ย : "one-Nth"; where ๐’…… gฬƒal2 may be omitted. "One-half", however, is ๐’‹—๐’Š’๐’€€ ลกu-ru-a, later ๐’‹—๐’Š‘๐’€€ ลกu-ri-a. Another way of expressing fractions was originally limited to weight measures, specifically fractions of the mina (๐’ˆ ๐’ˆพ ma-na): ๐’‘š ลกuลกลกana "one-third" (literarlly "two-sixths"), ๐’‘› ลกanabi "two-thirds" (the former two words are of Akkadian origins), ๐’‘œ gigฬƒusila or ๐’‡ฒ๐’Œ‹๐’‚† la2 gigฬƒ4 u "five-sixths" (literally "ten shekels split off (from the mina)" or "(a mina) minus ten shekels", respectively), ๐’‚† gigฬƒ4 "one-sixtieth", lit. "a shekel" (since a shekel is one-sixtieth of a mina). Smaller fractions are formed by combining these: e.g. one-fifth is ๐’Œ‹๐’น๐’น๐’‚† "12ร—1/60 = 1/5", and two-fifths are ๐’‘š๐’‡น๐’‚† "1/3 + (4 ร— 1/60) = 5/15 + 1/15 = 6/15 = 2/5".

Verbal morphology

General

The Sumerian finite verb distinguishes a number of moods and agrees (more or less consistently) with the subject and the object in person, number and gender. The verb chain may also incorporate pronominal references to the verb's other modifiers, which has also traditionally been described as "agreement", although, in fact, such a reference and the presence of an actual modifier in the clause need not co-occur: not only ๐’‚๐’‚ ๐’Œˆ๐’Œˆ๐’…†๐’บ๐’Œฆ e2-ลกe3 ib2-ลกi-du-un "I'm going to the house", but also ๐’‚๐’‚ ๐’‰Œ๐’บ๐’Œฆ e2-ลกe3 i3-du-un "I'm going to the house" and simply ๐’Œˆ๐’…†๐’บ๐’Œฆ ib2-ลกi-du-un "I'm going to it" are possible. Hence, the term "cross-reference" instead of "agreement" has been proposed. This article will predominantly use the term "agreement".

The Sumerian verb also makes a binary distinction according to a category that some regard as tense (past vs present-future), others as aspect (perfective vs imperfective), and that will be designated as TA (tense/aspect) in the following. The two members of the opposition entail different conjugation patterns and, at least for many verbs, different stems; they are theory-neutrally referred to with the Akkadian grammatical terms for the two respective forms โ€“ แธซamแนญu "quick" and marรป "slow, fat". Finally, opinions differ on whether the verb has a passive or a middle voice and how it is expressed.

It is often pointed out that a Sumerian verb does not seem to be strictly limited to only transitive or only intransitive usage: e.g. the verb ๐’†ญ kur9 can mean both "enter" and "insert / bring in", and the verb ๐’Œฃ de2 can mean both "flow out" and "pour out". This depends simply on whether an ergative participant causing the event is explicitly mentioned (in the clause and in the agreement markers on the verb). Some have even concluded that instead of speaking about intransitive and transitive verbs, it may be better to speak only of intransitive and transitive constructions in Sumerian.

The verbal root is almost always a monosyllable and, together with various affixes, forms a so-called verbal chain which is described as a sequence of about 15 slots, though the precise models differ. The finite verb has both prefixes and suffixes, while the non-finite verb may only have suffixes. Broadly, the prefixes have been divided in three groups that occur in the following order: modal prefixes, "conjugation prefixes", and pronominal and dimensional prefixes. The suffixes are a future or imperfective marker /-ed-/, pronominal suffixes, and an /-a/ ending that nominalizes the whole verb chain. The overall structure can be summarized as follows:

slot modal prefix "conjugation prefixes" pronominal prefix 1 dimensional prefix pronominal prefix 2 stem future/imperfective pronominal suffix nominalizer
finite prefix coordinator prefix ventive prefix middle prefix
common

morphemes

/ร˜/-,
/แธซa/-,
/u/-,
/ga/-,

/nu/-~/la/-


/i/~/e/-,

/a/-

-/nga/- /mu/-,

-/m/-

-/ba/- -/ร˜/-,
-/e/~/r/-,
-/n(n)/-,
-/b/-
-/a/-,

-/da/-, -/ta/-, -/ลกi/-, -/i/-, -/ni/-

-/ร˜/-,
-/e/~/r/-,
-/n(n)/-,
-/b/-
-/e(d)/- -/en/
-/en/
-/ร˜/, -/e/

-/enden/
-/enzen/
-/ene/, -/eลก/

-/a/

Examples using most of the above slots may be:

๐’„ฉ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ
แธซa-mu-un-na-ab-ลกum2-mu-ne

แธซa-

PREC

-mu-

-VEN-

-nn-

-3.SG.AN-

-a-

-DAT-

-b-

-3.INAN.O-

-ลกum-

-give-

-ene

-3.PL.AN.A/S.IPFV

แธซa- -mu- -nn- -a- -b- -ลกum- -ene

PREC -VEN- -3.SG.AN- -DAT- -3.INAN.O- -give- -3.PL.AN.A/S.IPFV

'Let them give it to him here!'

๐’‰ก๐’Œ’๐’…†๐’‚Š๐’„„๐’„„๐’€€
nu-ub-ลกi-e-gi4-gi4-a

nu-

NEG-

-i-

-FIN-

-b-

-INAN-

-ลกi-

-TERM-

-e-

-2.O-

-gi4-gi4-

-return.IPFV-

-e-

-3.A.IPFV-

-a

-NMLZ

nu- -i- -b- -ลกi- -e- -gi4-gi4- -e- -a

NEG- -FIN- -INAN- -TERM- -2.O- -return.IPFV- -3.A.IPFV- -NMLZ

'(one) who does not bring you back to it'

More than one dimensional prefix may occur within the verb chain. If so, the prefixes are placed in a specific order, which is shown the section Dimensional prefixes below. The "conjugation prefixes" appear to be mutually exclusive to a great extent, since the "finite" prefixes /i/~/e/- and /a/- do not appear before [mu]-, /ba/- and the sequence -/b/-+-/i/-, nor does the realization [mu] appear before /ba-/ or /b-i/. However, it is commonly assumed that the spellings im-, im-ma- and im-mi- are equivalent to {i-} + {-mu-}, {i-} + {-mu-} + {-ba-} and {i-} + {-mu-} + {-bi-}, respectively. According to Jagersma, the reason for the restrictions is that the "finite" prefixes /i/~/e/- and /a/- have been elided prehistorically in open syllables, in front of prefixes of the shape CV (consonant-vowel). The exception is the position in front of the locative prefix -/ni/-, the second person dative ๐’Š /-r-a/ and the second person directive ๐’Š‘ /-r-i/, where the dominant dialect of the Old Babylonian period retains them.

The modal prefixes express modality. Some of them are generally combined with certain TAs; in other cases, the meaning of a modal prefix can depend on the TA.

  • /ร˜-/ is the prefix of the simple indicative mood; in other words, the indicative is unmarked.

E.g.: ๐’…”๐’…ฅ in-gu7 {ร˜-i-n-gu} "He ate it."

  • ๐’‰ก nu- and ๐’†ท la-, ๐’‡ท li- (๐’‰Œ li2- in Ur III spelling) have negative meaning and can be translated as "not". The allomorphs /la-/ and /li-/ are used before the "conjugation prefixes" ๐’€ ba- and ๐’‰ˆ bi2-, respectively. A following vowel /i/ or /e/ is contracted with the preceding /u/ of nu- with compensatory lengthening (which is often graphically unexpressed): compare ๐’‰Œ๐’บ i3-du "he is walking", but /nu-i-du/ > /nuห-du/ ๐’‰ก๐’…‡๐’บ nu(-u3)-du "he isn't walking". If followed by a consonant, on the other hand, the vowel of nu- appears to have been assimilated to the vowel of the following syllable, because it occasionally appears written as ๐’ˆพ /na-/ in front of a syllable containing /a/.

E.g.: ๐’‰ก๐’Œฆ๐’…ฅ nu(-u3)-un-gu7 {nu-i-n-gu} "He didn't eat it."

  • ๐’„ฉ แธซa- / ๐’ƒถ แธซe2- has either precative/optative meaning ("let him do X", "may you do X") or affirmative meaning ("he does this indeed"), partly depending on the type of verb. If the verbal form denotes a transitive action, precative meaning is expressed with the marรป form, and affirmative with the แธซamแนญu form. In contrast, if the verbal form is intransitive or stative, the TA used is always แธซamแนญu. Occasionally the precative/optative form is also used in a conditional sense of "if" or "when". According to Jagersma, the base form is ๐’„ฉ แธซa-, but in open syllables the prefix merges with a following conjugation prefix i3- into ๐’ƒถ แธซe2-. Beginning in the later Old Akkadian period, the spelling also shows assimilation of the vowel of the prefix to ๐’ƒถ แธซe2- in front of a syllable containing /e/; in the Ur III period, there is a tendency to generalize the variant ๐’ƒถ แธซe2-, but in addition further assimilation to ๐’„ท แธซu- in front of /u/ is attested and graphic expressions of the latter become common in the Old Babylonian period. Other scholars have contended that ๐’ƒถ แธซe2- was the only allomorph in the Archaic Sumerian period and many have viewed it as the main form of the morpheme.

E.g.: ๐’ƒถ๐’…๐’…ฅ๐’‚Š แธซe2-eb-gu7-e {แธซa-ib-gu7-e} "let him eat it!"; ๐’„ฉ๐’€ญ๐’…ฅ แธซa-an-gu7 "He ate it indeed."

  • ๐’‚ต ga- has cohortative meaning and can be translated as "let me/us do X" or "I will do X". Occasional phonetic spellings show that its vowel is assimilated to following vowels, producing the allomorphs written ๐’„„ gi4- and ๐’„˜ gu2-. It is only used with แธซamแนญu stems, but nevertheless uses personal prefixes to express objects, which is otherwise characteristic of the marรป conjugation: ๐’‚ต๐’‰Œ๐’Œˆ๐’ƒป ga-ni-ib2-gฬƒar "let me put it there!". The plural number of the subject was not specially marked until the Old Babylonian period, during which the 1st person plural suffix began to be added: ๐’‚ต๐’‰Œ๐’Œˆ๐’ƒป๐’Š‘๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— ga-ni-ib2-gฬƒar-re-en-de3-en "let us put it there!".

E.g.: ๐’‚ต๐’€Š๐’…ฅ ga-ab-gu7 "Let me eat it!"

  • ๐’…‡ u3- has prospective meaning ("after/when/if") and is also used as a mild imperative "Please do X". It is only used with แธซamแนญu forms. In open syllables, the vowel of the prefix is assimilated to i3- and a- in front of syllables containing these vowels. The prefix acquires an additional /l/ when located immediately before the stem, resulting in the allomorph ๐’…‡๐’ŒŒ u3-ul-.

E.g.: ๐’Œฆ๐’…ฅ un-gu7 "If/when he eats it..."

  • ๐’ˆพ na- has prohibitive / negative optative meaning ("Do not do it!"/"He must not do it!"/"May he not do it!") or affirmative meaning ("he did it indeed"), depending on the TA of verb: it almost always expresses negative meaning with the marรป TA and affirmative meaning with the แธซamแนญu TA. In its negative usage, it can be said to function as the negation of the precative/optative แธซa-. In affirmative usage, it has been said to signal an emphatic assertion, but some have also claimed that it expresses reported speech (either "traditional orally transmitted knowledge" or someone else's words) or that it introduces following events/states to which it is logically connected ("as X happened (na-), so/then/therefore Y happened"). According to Jagersma and others, "negative na-" and "affirmative na-" are actually two different prefixes, since "negative na-" has the allomorph /nan-/ before a single consonant (written ๐’ˆพ๐’€ญ na-an- or, in front of the labial consonants /b/ and /m/, ๐’‰† nam-), whereas "affirmative na-" does not.

E.g.: ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’…ฅ๐’‚Š na-ab-gu7-e "He must not eat it!"; ๐’ˆพ๐’€ญ๐’…ฅ na-an-gu7 "He ate it indeed."

  • ๐’€๐’Š ba-ra- has emphatic negative meaning ("He certainly does/will not do it") or vetitive meaning ("He should not do it!"), although some consider the latter usage rare or non-existent. It can often function as the negation of cohortative ga- and of affirmative แธซa-. It is combined with the marรป TA if the verb denies an action (always present or future), and with the แธซamแนญu TA if it denies a state (past, present or future) or an action (always in the past). The vetitive meaning requires it to be combined with the marรป TA, at least if the action is transitive.

E.g.: ๐’€๐’Š๐’€Š๐’…ฅ๐’‚— ba-ra-ab-gu7-en "I certainly will not eat it!"; ๐’€๐’Š๐’€ญ๐’…ฅ ba-ra-an-gu7 "He certainly didn't eat it."

  • ๐’‰ก๐’‘ nu-uลก- is a rare prefix that has been interpreted as having "frustrative" meaning, i.e. as expressing an unrealizable wish ("If only he would do it!"). It occurs both with แธซamแนญu and with marรป.

E.g.: ๐’‰ก๐’‘๐’Œˆ๐’…ฅ๐’‚Š nu-uลก-ib2-gu7-e "If only he would eat it!"

  • ๐’…† ลกi-, earlier ๐’‚  ลกe3-, is a rare prefix, with unclear and disputed meaning, which has been variously described as affirmative ("he does it indeed"), contrapunctive ("correspondingly", "on his part"), as "reconfirming something that already ha(s) been stated or ha(s) occurred", or as "so", "therefore". It occurs both with แธซamแนญu and with marรป. In Southern Old Sumerian, the vowel alternated between /e/ before open vowels and /i/ before close ones in accordance with the vowel harmony rule of that dialect; later, it displays assimilation of the vowel in an open syllable, depending on the vowel of the following syllable, to /ลกa-/ (๐’Šญ ลกa- / ๐’บ ลกa4-) and (first attested in Old Babylonian) to ๐’‹— ลกu-.

E.g.: ๐’…†๐’…”๐’…ฅ ลกi-in-gu7 "So/correspondingly/accordingly(?), he ate it."

Although the modal prefixes are traditionally grouped together in one slot in the verbal chain, their behaviour suggests a certain difference in status: only nu- and แธซa- exhibit morphophonemic evidence of co-occurring with a following finite "conjugation prefix", while the others do not and hence seem to be mutually exclusive with it. For this reason, Jagersma separates the first two as "proclitics" and groups the others together with the finite prefix as (non-proclitic) "preformatives".

"Conjugation prefixes"

The meaning, structure, identity and even the number of the various "conjugation prefixes" have always been a subject of disagreements. The term "conjugation prefix" simply alludes to the fact that a Sumerian finite verb in the indicative mood must (nearly) always contain one of them. Which of these prefixes is used seems to have, more often than not, no effect on its translation into European languages. Proposed explanations of the choice of conjugation prefix usually revolve around the subtleties of spatial grammar, information structure (focus), verb valency, and, most recently, voice. The following description primarily follows the analysis of Jagersma (2010), largely seconded by Zรณlyomi (2017) and Sallaberger (2023), in its specifics; nonetheless, most of the interpretations in it are held widely, if not universally.

  • ๐’‰Œ i3- (Southern Old Sumerian variant: ๐’‚Š e- in front of open vowels), sometimes described as a finite prefix, appears to have a neutral finite meaning. As mentioned above, it generally does not occur in front of a prefix or prefix sequence of the shape CV except, in Old Babylonian Sumerian, in front of the locative prefix ๐’‰Œ -/ni/-, the second person dative ๐’Š -/r-a/- and the second person directive ๐’Š‘ -/r-i/-.

E.g.: ๐’…”๐’บ in-ล™e6 {ร˜-i-n-ล™e} "He brought (it)."

  • ๐’€€ a-, with the variant ๐’€  al- used in front of the stem, the other finite prefix, is rare in most Sumerian texts outside of the imperative form, but when it occurs, it usually has stative meaning. It is common in the Northern Old Sumerian dialect, where it can also have a passive meaning. According to Jagersma, it was used in the South as well during the Old Sumerian period, but only in subordinate clauses, where it regularly characterized not only stative verbs in แธซamแนญu, but also verbs in marรป; in the Neo-Sumerian period, only the pre-stem form al- was still used and it no longer occurred with marรป forms. Like i3-, the prefix a- does not occur in front of a CV sequence except, in Old Babylonian Sumerian, in front of the locative prefix ๐’‰Œ -/ni/-, the second person dative ๐’Š -/r-a/- and the second person directive ๐’Š‘ -/r-i/-.

E.g.: ๐’€ ๐’บ al-ล™e6 "It is/was brought."

  • ๐’ˆฌ mu- is most commonly considered to be a ventive prefix, expressing movement towards the speaker or proximity to the speaker; in particular, it is an obligatory part of the 1st person dative form ๐’ˆ  ma- (mu- + -a-). However, many of its occurrences appear to express more subtle and abstract nuances or general senses, which different scholars have sought to pinpoint. They have often been derived from "abstract nearness to the speaker" or "involvement of the speaker". It has been suggested, variously, that mu- may be adding nuances of emotional closeness or alignment of the speaker with the agent or other participants of the event,topicality, foregrounding of the event as something essential to the message with a focus on a person, movement or action directed towards an entity with higher social status, prototypical transitivity with its close association with "control, agency, and animacy" as well as focus or emphasis on the role of the agent,telicity as such or that it is attracted by personal dative prefixes in general, as is the Akkadian ventive.

E.g. ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’บ mu-un-ล™e6 "He brought it here."

  • ๐’…Ž im- and ๐’€€๐’€ญam3- are widely seen as being formally related to mu- and as also having ventive meaning; according to Jagersma, they consist of an allomorph of mu-, namely -/m/-, and the preceding prefixes ๐’‰Œ i3- and ๐’€€ a-. In his analysis, these combinations occur in front of a CV sequence, where the vowel -u- of mu- is lost, whereas the historically preceding finite prefix is preserved: */i-mu-ลกi-gฬƒen/ > ๐’…Ž๐’…†๐’บ im-ลกi-gฬƒen "he came for it". In Zรณlyomi's slightly different analysis, which is supported by Sallaberger, there may also be a -/b/- in the underlying form, which also elicits the allomorph -/m/-: *{i-mu-b-ลกi-gฬƒen} > /i-m-b-ลกi-gฬƒen/ > /i-m-ลกi-gฬƒen/. The vowel of the finite prefix undergoes compensatory lengthening immediately before the stem */i-mu-gฬƒen/ > ๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’บ i3-im-gฬƒen "he came".

E.g. ๐’…Ž๐’บ๐’ˆฌ im-tum3-mu {i-mu-b-tum-e} "He will bring it here."

  • The vowel of mu- is not elided in front of the locative prefix ๐’‰Œ -ni-, the second person dative ๐’Š /-r-a/ and the second person directive ๐’Š‘ /-r-i/. It may, however, be assimilated to the vowel of the following syllable. This produces two allomorphs:
    • ๐’ˆช mi- in the sequences ๐’ˆช๐’‰Œ mi-ni- and ๐’ˆช๐’Š‘ mi-ri-.

E.g. ๐’ˆช๐’‰Œ๐’…”๐’บ mi-ni-in-ล™e6 "He brought it in here."

    • ๐’ˆ  ma- in the sequence ๐’ˆ ๐’Š ma-ra-.

E.g. ๐’ˆ ๐’Š๐’€ญ๐’บ ma-ra-an-ล™e6 "He brought (it) here to you."

  • ๐’‰ˆ bi2- (Old Sumerian Lagaลก spelling: ๐’‰ bi- or be2- in front of open vowels; Old Sumerian Ur spelling: ๐’‰ฟ be6-) is usually seen as a sequence of the personal prefix -/b/- and the directive prefix -/i/- or -/e/-.

E.g. ๐’‰ˆ๐’…”๐’บ bi2-in-ล™e6 "He made it (the ox, the group of workers) bring (it)."

  • ๐’€ ba- can be analysed as a sequence of the personal prefix /b/- and the dative prefix -/a/-. However, it has been argued that, in spite of this origin, /ba-/ now occupies a slot of its own before the first pronominal prefix and the dimensional prefixes. In accordance with its assumed origin as b-a-, it has often been observed that ba- appears to have the meaning of a "3rd person inanimate dative": "for it", "to it". However, this explains only some of its occurrences. A number of other apparent meanings and uses of ba- have been noted, and most of these are subsumed by Jagersma under the overarching function of a middle voice marker. They include:
    1. a reflexive indirect object (to do something "for oneself");
    2. separation and movement "away" from the centre of attention towards a distant goal, especially with motion verbs;
    3. a change of state;
    4. the passive voice, i.e. occurrence with normally transitive verbs when their agent is not mentioned (the latter not in Northern Sumerian according to Jagersma). Some researchers also view it more generally as expressing focus or emphasis on the patient/goal and relatively low transitivity (and thereby as the polar opposite of mu- as they understand it).

E.g. ๐’€๐’€ญ๐’บ ba-an-ล™e6 "He brought it to it" / "He took it for himself" / "He took it away"; ๐’€๐’บ ba-ล™e6 "It was brought."

  • ๐’…Ž๐’ˆช im-mi- (Southern Old Sumerian ๐’‰Œ๐’ˆช i3-mi or, in front of open vowels, ๐’‚Š๐’ˆจ e-me-) and ๐’…Ž๐’ˆ  im-ma- (Southern Old Sumerian ๐’‚Š๐’ˆ  e-ma-) are generally seen as closely related to one another and im-mi- is widely considered to contain the directive prefix -i~e-. One common analysis is that im-mi- and im-ma- represent sequences of im- and bi2- and ba-, respectively, where the consonant /b/ has undergone assimilation to the preceding /m/. Accordingly, their meaning is considered to be simply a combination of the ventive meaning of im- and the meanings of bi2- and ba-, on which see above. This is the analysis espoused by Jagersma and Zรณlyomi and it is reflected in the schemes and examples in this article. Alternatively, some authors regard im-ma- as a prefix in its own right, and it has sometimes been ascribed a middle voice meaning distinct from the more passive nuance of ba-.

E.g. ๐’…Ž๐’ˆช๐’…”๐’บ im-mi-in-ล™e6 "He made it (the ox, the group of workers) bring it here"; ๐’…Ž๐’ˆ ๐’บ im-ma-ล™e6 "It was brought here."

  • ๐’€€๐’€ญ๐’ˆช am3-mi- and ๐’€€๐’€ญ๐’ˆ  am3-ma- are typically analysed along the same lines as im-mi- and im-ma-, but with a preceding am- (from a-) instead of im- (from i-); on the meaning of these see above.

The rare prefix -/nga/- means 'also', 'equally' (often written without the initial /n/, especially in earlier periods). It is of crucial importance for the ordering of the "conjugation prefixes", because it is usually placed between the conjugation prefix /i/- and the pronominal prefix, e.g. ๐’…”๐’‚ต๐’€ญ๐’ช in-ga-an-zu 'he, too, knows it', but it precedes the conjugation prefix /mu/-: ๐’ˆพ๐’‚ต๐’ˆฌ๐’ช na-ga-mu-zu 'he also understood it'. This suggests that these two conjugation prefixes must belong to different slots.

Although a conjugation prefix is almost always present, Sumerian until the Old Babylonian period allows a finite verb to begin directly with the locative prefix -/ni/-, the second person singular dative -/r-a/-, or the second person directive -/r-i/- (see below), because the prefixes i3-/e- and a- are apparently elided in front of them.

Pronominal and dimensional prefixes

The dimensional prefixes of the verb chain basically correspond to, and often repeat, the case markers of the noun phrase. Like the case markers of the noun phrase, the first dimensional prefix is normally attached to a preceding "head" โ€“ a pronominal prefix, which expresses the person, gender and number of its referent. The first dimensional prefix may be followed by up to two other dimensional prefixes, but unlike the first one, these prefixes never have an explicit "head" and cannot refer to animate nouns. The other slot where a pronominal prefix can occur is immediately before the stem, where it can have a different allomorph and expresses the person, gender and absolutive or the ergative participant (the transitive subject, the intransitive subject or the direct object), depending on the TA and other factors, as explained below.

There is some variation in the extent to which the verb of a clause that contains a noun in a given case also contains the corresponding pronominal and dimensional prefixes in the verb. The ergative participant is always expressed in the verb, as is, generally, the absolutive one (with some vacillation for the third person singular inanimate in transitive forms, as explained below); the dative, comitative, the locative and directive participant (used in a local meaning) also tend to be expressed relatively consistently; with the ablative and terminative, on the other hand, there is considerable variability. There are some cases, specified below, where the meanings of the cases in the noun phrase and in the verb diverge, so a noun case enclitic may not be reflected in the verb or, conversely, a verb may have a prefix that has no specific reference in the clause or in reality.

Pronominal prefixes

The forms of the pronominal prefixes are the following:

prefix Notes
1st person singular -/ส”/-? > /โ€‘V-/ The vowel -/V/- is identical to that of the preceding prefix (๐’ˆฌ๐’…‡ mu-u3-, ๐’€๐’€€ ba-a-, ๐’‰ˆ๐’‰Œ bi2-i3- etc.). Possibly originally a glottal stop /ส”/, which was later elided with compensatory lengthening of the preceding vowel.
2nd person singular ๐’‚Š -e-,
โ€‘/r/โ€‘
-/r/- before a vowel (before the dative and the directive prefixes, resulting in ๐’Š -ra- and ๐’Š‘ โ€‘ri-);

-/e/- before a consonant. -/e/- is assimilated to the preceding vowel, lengthening it (e.g. ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š mu-e- > ๐’ˆฌ๐’…‡ mu-u3- etc.) in the dialects attested before the Old Babylonian period. In the Old Babylonian dialect -e- is preserved (e.g. ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š mu-e-) and the preceding vowel may assimilate to the -/e/- instead: e.g. ๐’ˆจ me-.

3rd person singular animate โ€‘/n(n)/- According to Jagersma and a number of other scholars, the allomorph that appears in front of the vowel-initial dimensional prefixes, i.e. in front of dative -/a/- and directive -/i/-, is a geminate /nn/. The traditional view assumes simply /n/. The geminate analysis is assumed in the examples and glosses in this article.
3rd person inanimate โ€‘/b/โ€‘ Seems to be absent in some cases, see the main text. Note that the inanimate agreement marker has no number distinction.
1st person plural ๐’ˆจ -me- When the prefix is placed immediately before the stem and expresses a transitive subject, the singular is used instead. See the table in Pronominal agreement with subjects and direct objects.

As in the singular, the 3rd person animate form begins in a geminate /nn/ according to Jagersma and others.

2nd person plural ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ
โ€‘eโ€‘ne-,
-re-?
3rd person plural

(animate only)

๐’‰ˆ
โ€‘nne-

Confusingly, the subject and object prefixes (/-n-/, /-b-/, /-e-/, /-V-/) are not commonly spelled out in early texts, as both coda consonants and vowel length are often ignored in them. The "full" spellings do become more usual during the Third Dynasty of Ur (in the Neo-Sumerian period) and especially during the Old Babylonian period. Thus, in earlier texts, one finds ๐’ˆฌ๐’€ mu-ak and ๐’‰Œ๐’€ i3-ak (๐’‚Š๐’€ e-ak in Southern Sumerian) instead of ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’€ mu-un-ak and ๐’…”๐’€ in-ak for {mu-n-ak} and {i-n-ak} "he/she made", and also ๐’ˆฌ๐’€ mu-ak instead of Neo-Sumerian ๐’ˆฌ(๐’…‡)๐’€ mu(-u3)-ak or Old Babylonian ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š๐’€ mu-e-ak "you made". Vowel length never came to be expressed systematically, so the 1st person prefix was often graphically -โˆ…- during the entire existence of Sumerian.

Dimensional prefixes

The generally recognized dimensional prefixes are shown in the table below; if several occur within the same verb complex, they are placed in the order they are listed in.

dative comitative ablative terminative directive locative
/-a-/ ๐’• -da- (๐’‹พ -di3-) ๐’‹ซ -ta- (๐’Š -/ra/-) ๐’…† -ลกi- (early ๐’‚  -ลกe3-) -/i/-~-/e/- ๐’‚Š ๐’‰Œ -ni-

The ablative does not co-occur with the terminative, and the directive does not co-occur with the locative, so these pairs may be argued to share the same slot. Accordingly, the template can be said to include the following dimensional slots: dative - comitative - ablative/terminative - directive/locative.

A major exception from the general system of personal and dimensional prefixes is the very frequent prefix ๐’‰Œ -ni- "(in) there", which corresponds to a noun phrase in the locative, but doesn't seem to be preceded by any pronominal prefix and has demonstrative meaning by itself. This prefix is not to be confused with the homographic sequence ๐’‰Œ -ni- which corresponds to an animate noun phrase in the directive. In the latter case, ni is analysed as a combination of pronominal /-nn-/ and directive /-i-/ (roughly: "at him/her", "on him/her", etc.), whereas in the former, ni is unanalysable.

An example of a verb chain where several dimensional slots are occupied can be:

๐’…”๐’ˆพ๐’‹ซ๐’‰Œ๐’…”๐’Œ“๐’บ
in-na-ta-ni-in-ed2

i-

FIN-

-nn-

-3.SG.AN-

-a-

-DAT-

-ta-

-ABL-

-ni-

-LOC-

-n-

-3.AN.A-

-ed

-go.out

i- -nn- -a- -ta- -ni- -n- -ed

FIN- -3.SG.AN- -DAT- -ABL- -LOC- -3.AN.A- -go.out

'He made it (the dike) go out of it (a canal) for him into it (a locality)'

The comitative prefix -da- can, in addition, express the meaning "to be able to". In that case, there is a preceding pronominal prefix agreeing with the subject of the action: e.g. {nu-mu-e-da-n-dab-en} "you cannot catch him" (lit. "you won't catch him with yourself"). The directive has the meaning "on(to)" when the verb is combined with a noun in the locative case: e.g. {banลกur-a ninda b-i-b-gฬƒa-gฬƒa-en} "I will put bread on the table".

Differences and combinations between dimensional prefixes and noun case markers

While the meanings of the prefixes are generally the same as those of the corresponding nominal case markers, there are some differences:

  • The prefixes, unlike noun phrases in the corresponding cases, normally refer only to participants with a strong relationship to the action or state expressed by the verb (e.g. a temporal meaning like since X may be expressed by means of a noun phrase with a -ta case marker, but that normally wouldn't be cross-referenced with a -ta prefix on the verb).
  • The use of dimensional prefixes is sometimes more closely connected to special meanings of specific verbs and to lexical idiosyncrasies. For instance, the verb ๐’‡ฏ๐’บ ed3 has the meaning "go up" with the directive prefix, but "go down" with the ablative one, the verb ๐’‰š sa10 means "sell" with the ablative prefix and "buy" with the terminative, the verb ๐’Œ“๐’บ ed2 "leave, go out" always has the ablative prefix, and the phrasal verb ๐’…— ... ๐’„„ inim ... gi4 "answer" (lit. "return a word") always includes the locative. In general, verbs having a place-related meaning such as ๐’„ bala "cross", ๐’…… gฬƒal2 "be (somewhere), ๐’ƒป gฬƒar "put", ๐’บ gub "stand", ๐’†ญ kur9 "enter", ๐’‹› sig9 "put" and ๐’†ช tuลก "sit" generally occur with a dimensional prefix specifying a location. Thus, a verb may, albeit rarely, contain a dimensional prefix that simply modifies its meaning and has no reference. In such cases, it has no preceding pronominal prefix, even if it is the first dimensional prefix: e.g. ๐’€๐’Š๐’€ญ๐’‰š ba-ra-an-sa10 {ba-ta-n-sa} "he sold it".
  • The directive may be replaced by the dative when its slot is occupied by the locative or when it would have had animate reference, but there is a preceding prefix, which makes any further prefixes with animate reference illicit.

At the systemic level, there are some asymmetries between the nominal case markers and the verbal dimensional prefixes: they partly make different distinctions, and the nominal case marking is influenced by animacy. Because of these mismatches, different meanings are expressed by combinations of matching or non-matching noun cases and verb prefixes. The combinations may be summarized as follows:

meaning nominal case marker

(inanimate)

nominal case marker

(animate)

verbal prefix example

(inanimate)

example (animate)
inessive

"in(to)"

-/a/ (locative) ---- -/ni/- (locative) {e-a i-ni-n-gฬƒar}

"he placed it in the house"

----
superessive

"on(to)"

-/a/ (locative) -/ra/ (dative) -/i/~/e/- (directive) {e-a b-i-n-gฬƒar}

"he placed it on the house"

{lu-ra i-nn-i-n-gฬƒar}

"he placed it on the man"

adessive

"at" / causee

-/e/ (directive) -/ra/ (dative) -/i/~/e/- (directive) {e-e b-i-n-tag}

"he touched the house"

{lu-ra i-nn-i-n-tag}

"he touched the man"

dative -/e/ (directive) -/ra/ (dative) -/a/- (dative) {e-e b-a-n-ลกum}

"he gave it to the house"

{lu-ra i-nn-a-n-ลกum}

"he gave it to the man"

In some cases, there are also mismatches between nominal and verbal markers when exact correspondences would have been possible; these may serve to express additional shades of meaning. A dative noun case marker and terminative dimensional prefix may co-occur in the Ur III period. In general, from that time on, the choice of noun cases begins to be influenced by the government of corresponding Akkadian verbs, while the verbs themselves retain their older prefixes. According to Foxvog, /-ni-/ can resume non-locative cases such as the terminative and the dative.

A peculiar pattern of agreement occurs in what has been referred to as an external possession construction, in which a modifier of the verb refers to a certain object, almost always a body part, but it is emphasised that the action affects the possessor of that object (cf. English "he hit me on the head"). In that case, the verb may agree with the possessor with the directive prefix, while not agreeing with the object itself: thus, "he put barley in your hand" may be expressed by {ลกu-z(u).a ลกe i-r-i-n-gฬƒar}, lit. "he put barley at you, in your hand". Alternatively, it may agree with both the possessor and the object: the possessor is then referred to by the dative prefix: {ลกu-z(u)-a ลกe (i-)r-a-ni-n-gฬƒar}, lit. "he put barley to you, in there, in your hand".

Use of the ventive as a 1st person marker

When the dimensional prefix is dative -/a/-, the personal prefix of the 1st person appears to be absent, but the 1st person reference is expressed by the choice of the ventive conjugation prefix /mu/-. The sequence that expresses the 1st person dative is then: /mu-/ + /-a-/ โ†’ ๐’ˆ  ma-. When the intended meaning is that of the directive -/i/~/e/- ("on me", "in contact with me", etc.), it seems that the ventive conjugation prefix ๐’ˆฌ mu- alone serves to express it.

Syncope of /i/ in -/ni/- and -/bi/-

Two special phenomena occur if there is no absolutiveโ€“ergative pronominal prefix in the pre-stem position.

1. The sequences ๐’‰Œ -/ni/- (locative {-ni-} and personal + directive {-nn-i-}) and ๐’‰ˆ /bi/- (personal + directive {b-i-}) acquire the forms -/n/- and -/b/- (coinciding with the absolutiveโ€“ergative pronominal prefixes) before the stem if there isn't already an absolutiveโ€“ergative pronominal prefix in pre-stem position. This is typically the case when the verb is used intransitively. For example, the normal appearance of -ni- is seen in:

  • {mu-ni-n-kur} "he brought (it) in" (lit. 'caused (it) to go in)' > /muninkur/, written ๐’ˆฌ๐’‰Œ๐’†ญ mu-ni-kur9 in early texts, later ๐’ˆฌ๐’‰Œ๐’…”๐’†ญ mu-ni-in-kur9.

In contrast, in an intransitive form, we find a syncopated realization:

  • {mu-ni-kur} "he went in" > /muหnkur/, written ๐’ˆฌ๐’†ญ mu-kur9 in early texts, later ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’†ญ mu-un-kur9.

The preceding vowel undergoes compensatory lengthening, which is sometimes indicated by its doubling in the spelling:

  • {i-ni-kur} > i3-in-kur9 ๐’‰Œ๐’…”๐’†ญ "he went in".

Likewise, the normal realisation of bi- is seen in:

  • {i-b-i-n-si} > bi2-in-si ๐’‰ˆ๐’…”๐’‹› "he loaded (it) on it".

This is to be contrasted with the syncopated version in an intransitive form:

  • {i-b-i-si} > i3-ib2-si ๐’‰Œ๐’Œˆ๐’‹› "(it) was loaded on it".

The same phonological pattern is claimed to account for the alternation between the forms of the ventive prefix. The standard appearance is seen in:

{i-mu-n-ak} > mu-un-ak ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’€ "he did it here".

In an intransitive form, however, we find:

{i-mu-gฬƒen} > i3-im-gฬƒen ๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’บ "he came here".

Expression of the directive by a pre-stem personal prefix

A superficially very similar, but distinct phenomenon is that if there isn't already an absolutiveโ€“ergative pronominal prefix in pre-stem position, the personal prefix of the directive participant does not receive the dimensional prefix -/i/~/e/- at all and is moved to the pre-stem position. For example, the normal position of the directive participant is seen in:

  • {b-i-n-ak} bi2-in-ak ๐’‰ˆ๐’…”๐’€ "he applied (it) to it" (said of oil).

In contrast, in an intransitive form, we find:

  • {ba-b-ak} ba-ab-ak ๐’€๐’€Š๐’€ "it was applied to it".

In the same way, the normal position is seen in:

  • {b-i-n-us} bi2-in-us2 ๐’‰ˆ๐’…”๐’‘ โ‰ˆ "he adjoined (it) to it".

This can be contrasted with an intransitive form:

  • {i-b-us} ib2-us2 ๐’Œˆ๐’‘ โ‰ˆ "(it) was adjoined to it".
Absence of {-b-}

In some cases, the 3rd person inanimate prefix -b- appears to be unexpectedly absent.

  • -b- as the head of a dimensional prefix isn't used after the "conjugation prefix" ba-: thus *๐’€๐’€Š๐’…†๐’Œˆ๐’„„๐’„„ ba-ab-ลกi-ib2-gi4-gi4 "he will return it to it (for himself)" is impossible. This restriction does not, however, apply for -b- as a subject/object prefix immediately before the stem: thus, ๐’€๐’€Š๐’„„๐’„„ ba-ab-gi4-gi4 "he will return it (for himself)" is possible. In some schemes, this is formalized as the placement of the initial pronominal prefix b- in the same slot as ba- and not in the following slot, where all the other initial pronominal prefixes such as -n- are located.
  • -b- also regularly "fails" to appear after the ventive "conjugation prefix" mu-: instead of expected *๐’ˆฌ๐’Œ’๐’…†๐’บ mu-ub-ลกi-gฬƒen, the meaning "he came for it" is expressed by ๐’…Ž๐’…†๐’บ im-ลกi-gฬƒen. Similarly, instead of *๐’ˆฌ๐’Œ’๐’‚ท๐’‚ท mu-ub-gฬƒa2-gฬƒa2 for "he is placing it here", we find ๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’‚ท๐’‚ท i3-im-gฬƒa2-gฬƒa2. While some believe that /b/ in this case is truly omitted, others assume that such forms in fact contain an assimilated sequence -/mb/- > -/mm/- > -/m/-, just like the forms im-mi- and im-ma-, so that the above realisations actually stand for {i-m-b-ลกi-gฬƒen} and {i-m-b-gฬƒa-gฬƒa}.
  • For another case of absence of -b-, see the footnote on -b- as a marker of the transitive object in the table in the section on Pronominal agreement in conjugation.

Pronominal suffixes

The pronominal suffixes are as follows:

marรป แธซamแนญu
1st person singular ๐’‚— -en
2nd person singular ๐’‚— -en
3rd person singular (๐’‚Š) -e /-ร˜/
1st person plural ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— -en-de3-en
2nd person plural ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— -en-ze2-en
3rd person plural

(animate only)

(๐’‚Š)๐’‰ˆ -e-ne ๐’‚ /๐’Œ -eลก2/eลก

The initial vowel in all of the above suffixes can be assimilated to the vowel of the verb root; more specifically, it can become /u/ or /i/ if the vowel of the verb root is /u/ or /i/, respectively. It can also undergo contraction with an immediately preceding vowel. Pre-Ur III texts also spell the first- and second-person suffix -/en/ as -/e/, making it coincide with the third person in the marรป form.

Pronominal agreement with subjects and direct objects

Sumerian verbal agreement follows a nominativeโ€“accusative pattern in the 1st and 2nd persons of the marรป tense-aspect, but an ergativeโ€“absolutive pattern in most other forms of the indicative mood. Because of this presence of both patterns, Sumerian is considered a language with split ergativity. The general principle is that in the แธซamแนญu TA, the transitive subject is expressed by the prefix, and the direct object by the suffix, and in the marรป TA it is the other way round. For example, {i-b-dab-en} can be a แธซamแนญu form meaning "it caught me", where {-b-} expresses the subject "it" and {-en} expresses the object "I". However, it can also be a marรป form meaning "I will catch it", where {-en} expresses the subject "I" and {-b-} expresses the object "it". As for the intransitive subject, it is expressed, in both TAs, by the suffixes. For example, {i-kaลก-en} is "I ran", and {i-kaลก-ed-en} can be "I will run". This means that the intransitive subject is treated like the object in แธซamแนญu (which makes the แธซamแนญu pattern ergative) and like the subject in marรป (which makes the marรป pattern nominative-accusative).

There are two exceptions from the above generalization:

1. A transitive subject of the third person in marรป uses unique suffixes that are not the same as those of the intransitive subject and the แธซamแนญu direct object. For example, while "they ran" can be {i-kaลก-eลก}, just as "it caught them" can be {i-b-dab-eลก}, the corresponding form for "they will catch it" would be {i-b-dab-ene}. This pattern can be described as a case of tripartite alignment.

2. A plural transitive subject in the แธซamแนญu TA is expressed not only by the prefix, but also by the suffix: e.g. {i-n-dab-eลก} can mean "they caught (it)". Specifically, the prefix expresses only the person, while the suffix expresses both the person and the number of the subject.

Note that the prefixes of the plural transitive subject are identical to those of the singular โ€“ -/V/-, -/e/-, -/n/- โ€“ as opposed to the special plural forms -me-, -e-ne-, -ne- found in non-pre-stem position.

The use of the personal affixes for subjects and direct objects can be summarized as follows:

แธซamแนญu marรป
Direct object Intransitive subject Transitive subject Direct object Intransitive subject Transitive subject
1st sing ...-/en/ ...-/en/ -/V/-... -/V/-... ...-/en/ ...-/en/
2nd sing ...-/en/ ...-/en/ -/e/-... -/e/-... ...-/en/ ...-/en/
3rd sing

animate

...-/ร˜/ ...-/ร˜/ -/n/-... -/n/-... ...-/ร˜/ ...-/e/
3rd inanimate ...-/ร˜/ ...-/ร˜/ -/b/-... -/b/- ...-/ร˜/ ...-/e/
1st pl ...-/enden/ ...-/enden/ -/V/-...-/enden/ -/me/-? ...-/enden/ ...-/enden/
2nd pl ...-/enzen/ ...-/enzen/ -/e/-...-/enzen/ -/e-ne/-? ...-/enzen/ ...-/enzen/
3rd pl (animate only) ...-/eลก/ ...-/eลก/ -/n/-...-/eลก/ -/ne/-, -/b/- ...-/eลก/ ...-/ene/

Examples for TA and pronominal agreement: (แธซamแนญu is rendered with past tense, marรป with present):

  • {i-gub-en} (๐’‰Œ๐’บ๐’‰๐’‚—): "I stood" or "I stand"
  • {i-n-gub-en} (๐’…”๐’บ๐’‰๐’‚—): "he placed me" or "I place him"
  • {i-sug-enden} (๐’‰Œ๐’ป๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚—): "we stood/stand"
  • {i-n-dim-enden} (๐’…”๐’ถ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚—): "he created us" or "we create him"
  • {mu-V-dim-enden} (๐’ˆฌ๐’ถ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚—): "we created [someone or something]"
  • {i-b-gub-e} (๐’Œˆ๐’บ๐’‰) "he places it"
  • {i-b-dim-ene} (๐’Œˆ๐’ถ๐’ˆจ๐’‰ˆ): "they create it"
  • {i-n-dim-eลก} (๐’…”๐’ถ๐’ˆจ๐’Œ): "they created [someone or something]" or "he created them"
  • {i-sug-eลก} (๐’‰Œ๐’ป๐’„€๐’Œ): "they stood" or "they stand".

Stem

The verbal stem itself can also express grammatical distinctions within the categories number and tense-aspect. In a number of verbs, this involves suppletion or morphonological alternations that are not fully predictable.

1. With respect to number, plurality can be expressed by complete reduplication of the แธซamแนญu stem (e.g. ๐’†ญ๐’†ญ kur9-kur9 "enter (pl.)" or by a suppletive stem (e.g. ๐’บ gub "stand (sing.)" - ๐’ป sug2 "stand (pl.)". The traditional view is that both of these morphological means express plurality of the absolutive participant in Sumerian. However, it has often been pointed out that complete reduplication of the verb in Sumerian can also express "plurality of the action itself" intensity or iterativity, and that it is not obligatory in the presence of plural participants, but rather seems to expressly emphasize the plurality. According to some researchers, the predominant meaning of the suppletive plural stem is, indeed, plurality of the most affected participants, whereas the predominant meaning of complete reduplication is plurality of events (because they occur at multiple times or locations). However, even with suppletive plural stems, the singular may occur with a plural participant, presumably because the event is perceived as a single one.

2. With respect to tense-aspect marking, verbs are divided in four types; แธซamแนญu is always the unmarked TA.

  • The stems of the 1st type, regular verbs, are analysed in two ways: some scholars believe that they do not express TA at all, while others claim that they express marรป TA by adding a suffix -/e/ as in ๐’ถ๐’‚Š dim2-e vs ๐’ถ dim2 "make". This -/e/ would, however, nowhere be distinguishable from the first vowel of the pronominal suffixes except for intransitive marรป 3rd person singular; in that last form, the first analysis attributes the -/e/ to the presence of the -/e(d)/ suffix described below. The glosses in this article assume the first analysis.
  • The 2nd type expresses marรป by partial reduplication of the stem, e.g. ๐’†ญ kur9 vs ๐’†ญ๐’†ญ ku4-ku4 "enter". Usually, as in this example, this marรป reduplication follows the pattern C1V1-C1V1 (C1 = 1st consonant of the root, V = 1st vowel of the root). In a few cases, the template is instead C1V1C1C2V1.
  • The 3rd type expresses marรป by adding a consonant, e.g. te vs tegฬƒ3 "approach" (both written ๐’‹ผ). A number of scholars do not recognise the existence of such a class or consider it dubious.
  • The 4th type uses a suppletive stem, e.g. ๐’…— dug4 vs ๐’‚Š e "do, say". Thus, as many as four different suppletive stems can exist, as in the admittedly extreme case of the verb "to go": ๐’บ gฬƒen ("to go", แธซamแนญu sing.), ๐’บ du (marรป sing.), (๐’‚Š)๐’ป (e-)re7 (แธซamแนญu plur.), ๐’ป sub2 (marรป plur.).

The following tables show some of the most frequent stem alternations.

Verbs with suppletive plurals
singular plural meaning
๐’บ gub ๐’ป sug2 "stand"
๐’‹พ til2 (๐’‡ป lug for animals) ๐’…Š se12/sig7 "live"
๐’บ tum2 ๐’บ๐’บ laแธซ5 "lead"/"carry countable objects"?
๐’†ญ kur9 ๐’” sun5 "enter" (the use of the suppletive plural stem seems to be optional)
Verbs with suppletive marรป forms
singular plural meaning
แธซamแนญu marรป แธซamแนญu marรป
๐’…— dug4 ๐’‚Š e (marรป participle ๐’ฒ di(-d)) "do", "say"
๐’บ gฬƒen ๐’บ du (๐’‚Š)๐’ป (e-)re7 ๐’ป sub2 "go"
๐’บ ล™e6 ๐’‰ tum3 -------------- "carry", "bring"/"carry an uncountable mass"?
๐’†ช tuลก ๐’†ช dur2 ๐’‚‰ durun "sit", "live somewhere"
๐’ uลก4 ๐’ ug7/๐’‚ฆ ug5 "die"
Frequent verbs with reduplicating marรป forms
แธซamแนญu marรป meaning
๐’‰‹ bil2 ๐’‰‹๐’‰‹ BIL2-BIL2 burn
๐’Š‘ degโ‚“ ๐’Š‘๐’Š‘ de5-de5 gather
๐’‚„ dun DUN-DUN string up together
๐’” dun5 DUN5-DUN5 swing
๐’…๐’‚ท/๐’… gagฬƒ ga6-ga6 carry
๐’„„ gi4 gi4-gi4 turn
๐’ฝ gir5 GIR5-GIR5 slip, dive
๐’†ฅ gur10 GUR10-GUR10 reap
๐’ƒป gฬƒar ๐’‚ท๐’‚ท gฬƒa2-gฬƒa2 put
๐’„ฉ๐’†ท แธซa-la ๐’„ฌ๐’„ฉ แธซal-แธซa divide
๐’…†๐’Œจ แธซulu ๐’…†๐’Œจ๐’„ท แธซulu-แธซu /แธซulแธซu/ be bad, destroy
๐’†ฅ kigฬƒ2 KIGฬƒ2-KIGฬƒ2 seek
๐’†ญ kur9 ku4-ku4 enter
๐’Šฌ mu2 mu2-mu2 grow
๐’Œ† mur10 mu4-mu4 dress
๐’…˜ nagฬƒ na8-na8 drink
๐’†ธ๐’†ธ nigฬƒin ๐’†ธ๐’†ธ ni10-ni10, ๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ ne-ne go around
๐’Š raแธซ2 ra-ra hit
๐’‰š sa10 sa10-sa10 barter
๐’‹› si si-si fill
๐’‹ข sug6 su2-su2 repay
๐’‚ž ลกeลก2 ลกe8-ลกe8 anoint, cry
๐’Œ‹ ลกuลก, ๐’‹™ ลกuลก2 ๐’Œ‹๐’Œ‹ ลกu4-ลกu4, ๐’‹™๐’‹™ ลกu2-ลกu2 cover
๐’‹บ taka4 da13-da13 leave behind
๐’‹ผ๐’‚— te-en te-en-te cool off
๐’‹—๐’‰€ tu5 tu5-tu5 bathe in
๐’Œ‡ tuku du12-du12 have
๐’‹ณ tuku5 TUKU5-TUKU5 weave
๐’…‡ ...๐’†ช u3 ...ku4 u3 ...ku4-ku4 sleep
๐’ฃ zig3 zi-zi rise
๐’ช zu zu-zu learn, inform

The modal or imperfective suffix -/ed/

Before the pronominal suffixes, a suffix -/ed/ or -/d/ can be inserted (the /d/ is only realized if other vowels follow, in which case the /e/ in turn may be elided): e.g. ๐’‰Œ๐’€„(๐’‚Š)๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— i3-zaแธซ3(-e)-de3-en {i-zaแธซ-ed-en} "I will/must escape", ๐’‰Œ๐’€„๐’‚Š i3-zaแธซ3-e {i-zaแธซ-ed} "he will/must escape". This suffix is considered to account for occurrences of -e in the third-person singular marรป of intransitive forms by those who do not accept the theory that -e itself is a marรป stem formant.

The function of the suffix is somewhat controversial. Some view it as having a primarily modal meaning of "must" or "can" or future meaning. Others believe that it primarily signals simply the imperfective status of a verb form, i.e. a marรป form, although its presence is obligatory only in intransitive marรป forms and in non-finite forms. In intransitive forms, it thus helps to distinguish marรป from แธซamแนญu; for instance, in the above example, ๐’‰Œ๐’€„๐’‚— i3-zaแธซ3-en alone, without -/ed/-, could have been interpreted as a แธซamแนญu form "I escaped". In contrast, in the analysis of scholars who do not believe that -/ed/- is obligatory in marรป, many intransitive forms like i3-zaแธซ3-en can be both แธซamแนญu and marรป.

The vowel /e/ of this suffix undergoes the same allophonic changes as the initial /e/ of the person suffixes. It is regularly assimilated to /u/ in front of stems containing the vowel /u/ and a following labial consonant, /r/ or /l/, e.g. ๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ๐’• ลกum2-mu(-d) (< {ลกum-ed}). It is also assimilated and contracted with immediately preceding vowels, e.g. ๐’„„ gi4-gi4 /gi-gi-i(d)/ < {gi-gi-ed} "which will/should return". The verb ๐’บ du "go" never takes the suffix.

Use of the tense-aspect forms

Jagersma systematizes the use of the tense-aspect forms in the following patterns:

  • แธซamแนญu is used to express completed (perfective) actions in the past, but also states (past or present) and timeless truths. It is also used in conditional clauses with the conjunction ๐’‹—๐’ƒป๐’Œ‰๐’‡ฒ๐’‰ tukumbi 'if'.
  • marรป is used to express actions in the present and future, but also non-completed (imperfective) actions in the past (like the English past progressive tense), and, rarely, actions in the past that are still relevant or operative (like the English present perfect tense). It is also used in conditional clauses with the conjunction ๐’Œ“๐’• ud-da 'if'. Verba dicendi introducing direct speech are also placed in marรป.

In addition, different moods often require either a แธซamแนญu or a marรป stem and either a แธซamแนญu or a marรป agreement pattern depending on various conditions, as specified in the relevant sections above and below.

In more general terms, modern scholars usually state that the difference between the two forms is primarily one of aspect: แธซamแนญu expresses perfective aspect, i.e. a completed action, or sometimes possibly punctual aspect, whereas marรป expresses imperfective aspect, i.e. a non-completed action, or sometimes possibly durative aspect. In contrast, the time at which the action takes place or at which it is completed or non-completed is not specified and may be either past, present or future. This contrasts with the earlier view, prevalent in the first half of the 20th century, according to which the difference was one of tense: แธซamแนญu was thought to express the past (preterite) tense, and marรป was considered to express present-future tense, while the use of marรป with past-tense reference was viewed as a stylistic device (cf. the so-called historical present use in other languages). Indeed it has been pointed out that a translation of แธซamแนญu with past tense and marรป with present or future tense does work well most of the time; this may correspond to the cases in which the action was viewed by Sumerian speakers as completed or non-completed with respect to the present moment.

The imperative mood

The imperative mood construction is produced with a แธซamแนญu stem, but using the marรป agreement pattern, by turning all prefixes into suffixes. In the plural, the second person plural ending is attached in a form that differs slightly from the indicative: it is /-(n)zen/, with the -/n/- appearing only after vowels. The stem is singular even in the plural imperative. Compare the following indicative-imperative pairs:

Indicative Imperative
๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ
mu-un-na-ab-ลกum2-mu

mu-

VEN-

-nn-

-3.SG.AN-

-a-

-DAT-

-b-

-3.INAN.O-

-ลกum-

-give-

-e

-3.AN.A

mu- -nn- -a- -b- -ลกum- -e

VEN- -3.SG.AN- -DAT- -3.INAN.O- -give- -3.AN.A

"He will give it to him here."

๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š
ลกum2-mu-un-na-ab

ลกum-

give-

-mu-

-VEN-

-nn-

-3.SG.AN-

-a-

-DAT-

-b

-3.INAN.O

ลกum- -mu- -nn- -a- -b

give- -VEN- -3.SG.AN- -DAT- -3.INAN.O

"Give it to him here!"

๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ข๐’‚—
mu-un-na-ab-ลกum2-mu-un-ze2-en

mu-

VEN-

-nn-

-3.SG.AN-

-a-

-DAT-

-b-

-3.INAN.O-

-ลกum-

-give-

-enzen

-2.PL

mu- -nn- -a- -b- -ลกum- -enzen

VEN- -3.SG.AN- -DAT- -3.INAN.O- -give- -2.PL

"You (plur.) will give it to him"

๐’Œฆ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’ข๐’‚—
ลกum2-mu-un-na-ab-ze2-en

ลกum-

give-

-mu-

-VEN-

-nn-

-3.SG.AN-

-a-

-DAT-

-b-

-3.INAN.O-

-zen

-2.PL.A/S.IMP

ลกum- -mu- -nn- -a- -b- -zen

give- -VEN- -3.SG.AN- -DAT- -3.INAN.O- -2.PL.A/S.IMP

'Give (plur.) it to him here!'

This may be compared with the French pair vous le lui donnez, but donnez-le-lui!

In addition, the prefix ๐’‰Œ i3- is replaced by /-a/: ๐’‰Œ๐’บ i3-gฬƒen "he went", but ๐’บ๐’ˆพ gฬƒen-na "go!", ๐’…”๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’‰ in-na-ab-be2 "he will say it to him", but ๐’…—๐’‚ต๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ(๐’€Š) dug4-ga-an-na(-ab) 'say it to him!'. However, the vowel /e/ and possibly /i/ occasionally also occur if no further prefixes follow, perhaps as a characteristic of southern dialects. The ventive prefix mu-, if not followed by others, has the form ๐’Œ -um in the imperative: ๐’บ๐’Œ ล™e6-um 'bring it here!' In Old Babylonian texts, the reduced form -/u/ and the more regular -/am/ {-a-m} are also found: ๐’‚ท๐’‰ก gฬƒe26-nu, ๐’บ๐’€€๐’€ญ gฬƒen-am3, both "come here!"

Participles

Sumerian participles can function both as verbal adjectives and as verbal nouns. As verbal adjectives, they can describe any participant involved in the action or state expressed by the verb: for instance, ๐’‹ง๐’ˆ  ลกum2-ma may mean either "(which was) given (to someone)", "who was given (something)" or "who gave". As verbal nouns, they denote the action or state itself, so ๐’‹ง๐’ˆ  ลกum2-ma may also mean '(the act of) giving' or 'the fact that X gave Y'. Participles are formed in the following ways:

  • The bare แธซamแนญu stem can function as a participle. It usually expresses timeless truths: ๐’‹ง ลกum2 may be a person who regularly/constantly gives, something regularly given, or the regular act of giving.
  • Another way to form participles is by means of adding the nominalizing marker -/a/ to the แธซamแนญu stem: ๐’‹ง๐’ˆ  ลกum2-ma "given". The verb form constructed in this way characterizes an entity with a specific action or state in the past or a state in the present (๐’‹พ๐’†ท til3-la "alive"). The verbs ๐’Œ‡ tuku "have" and ๐’ช zu "know" usually omit the ending -/a/, as does the verb ๐’€ ak "do". According to Jagersma, the nominalizing marker had the effect of geminating the preceding consonant (e.g. /ลกumหa/), which is evident from Akkadian loanwords, and this effect was due to its original form being /ส”a/ with a glottal stop that later assimilated to preceding consonants (/ลกumส”a/ > ลกumหa).
  • The marรป stem can be combined with the suffix -/ed/ to form another participle, which often has a future and modal meaning similar to the Latin gerundive, e.g. ๐’ถ๐’ˆจ dim2-me(-d) "which will/should be made". Adding a locative-terminative marker /-e/ after the /-ed/ yields a form with a meaning similar to the Latin ad + gerund (acc.) construction: ๐’ถ(๐’ˆจ)๐’‰ˆ dim2(-me)-de3 = "(in order) to make". A similar meaning can be expressed by adding the locative marker: ๐’ถ(๐’ˆจ)๐’• dim2(-me)-da = "(for it) to be made". The main difference is that in the construction with -(ed)-e, the subject of the intended action is the same as the subject of the main clause, while it is different in the construction with -(ed)-a. The analysis of this participle is controversial along the same lines as that of the meaning of the suffix -ed in finite forms (see above). Some Sumerologists describe its meaning as primarily modal and distinguish it from a separate imperfective participle that consists of the marรป stem alone, e.g. ๐’ถ๐’ˆจ dim2-me 'which is/was making', ๐’„„๐’„„ gi4-gi4 "returning". Others believe that it this is also the normal marรป participle and that it has, in addition, the imperfective meanings "which is/was cutting" and "which is/was being cut". Besides the allomorphy of the suffix -/ed/ already treated above, the verb ๐’…— dug4 "do, say" has a suppletive participial stem in this form: ๐’ฒ di(-d).
  • The marรป stem can also occur with the suffix -/a/. Nonetheless, according to Jagersma, this form is rare outside the combination with a following possessive pronominal marker to express temporal meaning, as explained in the Syntax section: e.g. ๐’ถ(๐’ˆจ)๐’•๐’‰Œ dim2(-me)-da-ni "when he makes (something)".

Copula verb

The copula verb /me/ "to be" is mostly used in an enclitic form. Its conjugation is as follows:

singular plural
1st person ๐’ˆจ๐’‚— -me-en ๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— -me-en-de3-en
2nd person ๐’ˆจ๐’‚— -me-en ๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— -me-en-ze2-en
3rd person ๐’€€๐’€ญ -am3

(Old Sumerian ๐’€ญ -am6)

๐’€ญ๐’ˆจ๐’Œ -me-eลก

In addition, the initial vowel of the form -am3 is reduced to -/m/ after enclitics ending in a vowel: ๐’‚๐’ˆฌ๐’Œ e2-gฬƒu10-um "it is my house". Like other final consonants, the -m may not be expressed in early spelling.

These enclitic forms are used instead of a simple sequence of finite prefix, root and personal suffix *i3-me-en, *i-me etc. For more complex forms, the independent copula form is used: ๐’‰Œ๐’ˆจ๐’€€ i3-me-a "that he is", ๐’‰ก๐’…‡๐’ˆจ๐’‚— nu-u3-me-en "I am not". Unlike the enclitic, it typically uses the normal stem ๐’ˆจ -me- in the 3rd person singular (๐’€๐’Š๐’ˆจ ba-ra-me "should not be"), except for the form prefixed with แธซa-, which is ๐’ƒถ๐’…Ž แธซe2-em or ๐’ƒถ๐’€€๐’€ญ แธซe2-am3.

For a negative equivalent of the copula in the 3rd person, it seems that the word ๐’‰ก nu "not" alone instead of *nu-um is used predicatively (e.g. ๐’๐’‰ก urud nu "it is not copper") although the form ๐’‰ก(๐’Œฆ)๐’‚ต๐’€€๐’€ญ nu-(un)-ga-am3 "it is also not ..." is attested. A different word is used to express existence or being present/located somewhere: ๐’…… gฬƒal2.

A peculiar feature of the copula is that it seems to form a relative clause without the nominalizing suffix /-a/ and thus uses the finite form: thus, instead of ๐’‰Œ๐’ˆจ๐’€€ i3-me-a, simply ๐’€€๐’€ญ -am3 is used: ๐’†ฌ๐’ƒป๐’‚ต๐’Š๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’ˆ ๐’€ญ๐’‹ง kug nigฬƒ2-gur11-ra-ni-im ma-an-ลกum2 "he gave me silver (which) was his property", which appears to say "The silver was his property, he gave it to me". In the negative, the full form ๐’‰ก๐’ˆจ๐’€€ nu-me-a "which is not" is used, and likewise in non-relative functions.

Passive voice

Some scholars believe that it is possible to speak of a passive voice in Sumerian. Jagersma (2010) distinguishes three attested passive constructions. In each case, the ergative participant and the corresponding agreement marker on the verb are removed, so that the verb is inflected intransitively, but there may also be some additional cues to ensure a passive interpretation. The passive may be formed:

  1. By simply eliminating the agent of a transitive verb and the corresponding agreement marker: {engar-e e i-n-ล™u} "the farmer built the house" > โ€  {e i-ล™u} "the house was built". As a dynamic passive, in reference to the event itself, this construction is obsolete in แธซamแนญu by the time of the earliest records according to Jagersma. However, it is still used with modal prefixes and in marรป: e.g. {e แธซa-i-ล™u} "May the house be built!" Moreover, it continues to be used as a stative passive in Southern Sumerian, so {e i-ล™u} can mean "the house is built (i.e. complete)".
  2. With the prefix ๐’€ ba-, e.g. {e ba-ล™u}. This is only found in Southern Sumerian and expresses only a dynamic passive, i.e. it refers to the event itself: "The house was (came to be) built".
  3. With the prefix {a-}, e.g. {e al-ล™u}. This is only found in Northern Sumerian and can have both a stative and a dynamic sense: "The house is built (complete)" or "The house was (came to be) built".

The agent is never expressed in the passive clause in Sumerian.

While the existence of such intransitive constructions of normally transitive verbs is widely recognized, some other scholars have disputed the view that these constructions should be called "passives". They prefer to speak of one-participant or agentless constructions and to limit themselves to the observation that the prefixes ba- and a- tend to be preferred with such constructions, apparently as a secondary effect of another, more subtle feature of their meaning. Concerning the history of the constructions, it has been claimed that the passive(-like) use of ba- does not appear before the Ur III period; Jagersma, on the contrary, states that it is attested already in the Old Sumerian period, although it becomes especially frequent in Ur III times.

A different construction has been posited and labelled "Sumerian passive voice" by a significant number of scholars. According to them, too, a passive is formed by removing the ergative participant and the verbal marker that agrees with it, but the verb is not inflected as an intransitive one: instead, it has a personal prefix, which refers to the "logical object": {e i-b-ล™u} or {e ba-b-ล™u} "the house is being built". The stem is always แธซamแนญu. Some consider this construction to have only the function and meaning of a marรป form, while others consider the tense-aspect opposition to be neutralized in it. The personal prefix is nearly always -b- in identified cases; views differ on whether it agrees in gender with an animate logical object, appearing as -n-, or whether it remains -b-. Critics have argued that most alleged examples of the construction are actually instances of the pre-stem personal prefix referring to the directive participant in an intransitive verb, at least before the Old Babylonian period. Pascal Attinger considers it plausible that the original construction was indeed a directive one, whereas its new passive function as described by him arose via a reinterpretation in the Old Babylonian period; Walther Sallaberger, on the contrary, believes this kind of passive to be characteristic of Neo-Sumerian and to have been lost in Old Babylonian. A further possibility is that at least some of these cases actually have an impersonal 3rd person inanimate subject: "'it' has / they have built the house".

Causative construction

Sumerian doesn't have dedicated causative morphology. Causativity is expressed syntactically in two ways, depending on the transitivity of the verb.

  1. An intransitive verb is made transitive and thus acquires causative meaning merely by adding an ergative participant and the appropriate agreement marker: {gud i-gub} "the ox stood" - {engar-e gud i-n-gub} "the farmer made the ox stand".
  2. A transitive verb is made causative by placing the ergative participant in the directive: {engar-e gud-e u b-i-n-gu} "the farmer made the ox eat grass". For animates, as usual, the directive case marker is replaced by the dative one: {engar-e dumu-ra ninda i-nn-i-n-gu} "the farmer made the child eat bread". A further example can be {digฬƒir-e engar-ra gud i-nn-i-n-gub}: "the god made the farmer make the ox stand".
  3. The causative constructions can in turn be passivized using the prefix ba-: {gud ba-gub} "the ox was caused to stand", {gud-e u ba-b-gu} "the ox was caused to eat grass" (lit. "grass was caused to be eaten by the ox"), {dumu-ra ninda ba-n-gu} "the child was caused to eat bread".

In Old Babylonian Sumerian, new causative markers have been claimed to have arisen under the influence of Akkadian; this is explained in the section on Interference from Akkadian and other late phenomena.

Phrasal verbs

A specific problem of Sumerian syntax is posed by the numerous phrasal verbs (traditionally called "compound verbs" in Sumerology in spite of the fact that they are not compounds, but idiomatic combinations). They usually involve a noun immediately before the verb, forming a lexical/idiomatic unit: e.g. ๐’…†...๐’‚ƒ igi ...du8, lit. "open the eye" = "see, look". Their case government and agreement patterns vary depending on the specific verb. The component noun is usually in the absolutive case, but may be in the directive. If the phrasal verb takes another noun as a "logical object", the verbal infix is typically the directive, while the noun case is most commonly either the directive (dative if animate), which otherwise has the meaning "at / with respect to", or the locative (dative if animate), which otherwise has the meaning "on":

  • Directive:
    • ๐’…†...๐’‚ƒ igi ...du8 ({NOUN-e igi ...-e~i-...du}), lit. "open the eye at something" > "see"
    • ๐’†ฅ...๐’€ kigฬƒ2 ...ak, lit. "do work with respect to something" > "work (on) something"
    • ๐’‹—๐’‹ณ...๐’…— ลกu-tag ...dug4, lit. "do hand-touching with respect to something" > "decorate"
    • ๐’Š“...๐’…— sa2 dug4, lit. "do equal with respect to something" > "reach"
    • ๐’„‘...๐’‹ณ gฬƒeลก ...tag, lit. "make wood touch 'at' something" > "sacrifice something".
    • ๐’‹›...๐’ฒ si ...sa2 ({NOUN-e si ...-e~i-...sa}), lit. "make the horns(?) equal with respect to something" > "put something in order"; likewise used intransitively: {NOUN-e si b-i-sa}, lit. "the horns (?) are equal with respect to something" > "something is in order".
  • Locative "on":
    • ๐’…—...๐’ƒป inim ...gฬƒar ({NOUN-a inim ...-e~i-...gฬƒar}), lit. "place a word on something" > "claim, place a claim on"
    • ๐’‹—...๐’‡ ลกu ...bar, lit. "open / remove the hand on something" > "release"
    • ๐’ˆฌ...๐’„ท๐’ˆฟ mu ...sa4, lit. "call a name on someone" > "to name"
    • ๐’‰†...๐’‹ป nam ...tar, lit. "cut a fate upon someone" > "determine the fate of someone"
    • ๐’€ ...๐’†• al ...ล™u2, lit. "raise the hoe upon something" > "dig"
    • ๐’‡ท...๐’‹ป en3 ...tar, lit. "cut a question(?) on something" > "investigate"

Less commonly, the case of the logical object and the pronominal infix may be:

  • Dative (directive if inanimate):
    • ๐’† ...๐’‰˜ ki ...agฬƒ2 ({NOUN-ra ki ...agฬƒ}) lit. "to measure out a place for someone" = "to love someone"
    • ๐’…— ...๐’Œฃ gu3 ...de2, lit. "to pour out the voice for someone" = "to call for someone"
    • ๐’€€ ...๐’Š’ a ...ru, lit. "to eject water for someone" = "to dedicate something to someone"
  • Terminative: ๐’…† ...๐’‡ igi ...bar (NOUN-ลกe igi ...bar) lit. "bring out the eye towards something" = "see, look"
  • Comitative: ๐’€‰ ...๐’‰˜ a2 ...agฬƒ2 ({NOUN-da a ...agฬƒ}) lit. "measure out power (?) with someone" = "to give orders to someone"
  • Locative "in":
    • ๐’‹—... ๐’ ลกu ...gid2 ({NOUN-a ลกu ... gid}), lit. "stretch out the hand into something" = "to perform extispicy on"
    • ๐’‹—... ๐’„ ลกu ...bala, lit. "let one's hand go across in something" = "alter"

Another possibility is for the component noun to be in the dative (directive if inanimate), while the object is in the absolutive:

  • ๐’‹—...๐’‹พ ลกu ...ti ({ลกu-e NOUN ...ti}) lit. "make something come close to the hand" = "to receive something" ("from someone" is expressed by the terminative: {NOUN2-ลกe ลกu-e NOUN1 ...ti})

Syntax

General features

The basic word order is subjectโ€“objectโ€“verb; verb finality is only violated in rare instances, in poetry. The moving of a constituent towards the beginning of the phrase may be a way to highlight it, as may the addition of the copula to it. Modifiers (adjectives, genitive phrases etc.) are normally placed after the noun: ๐’‚๐’‰‹ e2 gibil "a new house" ๐’‚๐’ˆ—๐’†ท e2 lugal-la "the house of the owner". However, the so-called anticipatory genitive (๐’‚๐’€€๐’ˆ—๐’‰ˆ e2-a lugal-bi "the owner of the house", lit. "of the house, its owner") is common and may signal the possessor's topicality. There are no adpositions, but noun phrases in a certain case may resemble prepositions and have a similar function:

  • ๐’Šฎ...๐’€€๐’…— ลกag4 X-a-ka, lit. "in the heart of X" = "inside/among X".
  • ๐’…† ... ๐’€€๐’‚  igi X-a-ลกe3, lit. "for the eyes of X" = "in front of X".
  • ๐’‚•...๐’€€๐’…— egir X-a-ka, lit. "at the back of X" = "behind/after X".
  • ๐’€€๐’…—...๐’€€๐’…— X ugu2 X-a-ka, lit. "on the skull of X" = "on top of X", "concerning X"
  • ๐’‡...๐’€€๐’…— bar X-a-ka, lit. "outside of X" = "because of X" (in Old Sumerian).
  • ๐’ˆฌ/๐’‰† ... ๐’€€๐’‚  mu/nam X-a-ลกe3, lit. "for the name/fate of X" = "because of X" (in Neo-Sumerian).

Subordinate clauses

There are various ways to express subordination. Many of them include the nominalization of a finite verb with the suffix -/a/, which is also used to form participles, as shown above. Like the participles, this nominalized clause can either modify a noun, as adjectives do, or refer to the event itself, as nouns do. It usually functions as a relative clause, corresponding to an English clause with "which ..." or "who ...", as in the following example:

๐’‡ฝ๐’‚๐’…”๐’†•๐’€€
lu2 e2 in-ล™u2-a

lu

man

e

house

i-n-ล™u-a

FIN-3.A-build-NMLZ

lu e i-n-ล™u-a

man house FIN-3.A-build-NMLZ

"the man who built the house"

Like the participles, the relative clauses can describe any participant involved in the action or state expressed by the verb, and the specific participant is determined by context: e.g. ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€ญ๐’‹ง๐’ˆ  {mu-nna-n-ลกum-a} can be "which he gave to him", "who gave (something) to him", etc. The nominalized clause can also be a complement clause, corresponding to an English clause with "that ...", e.g. e2 in-ล™u2-a (in-zu) "(he knows) that he built the house". Like a noun, it can be followed by case morphemes:

  • In the locative case (with added ๐’€€ -a), it means "when": e2 in-ล™u2-a-a "when he built the house" (more literally "in his building of the house"), although this is more common in Old Sumerian.
  • In the ablative case (with added ๐’‹ซ -ta), it means "after" or "since": e2 in-ล™u2-a-ta "after he built the house"; the particle ๐’Š‘ -ri may express the same meaning as ๐’‹ซ -ta.
  • In the terminative case (with added ๐’‚  -ลกe3), it has a meaning close to "before" or "as to the fact that": e2 nu-ล™u2-a-ลกe3 "while he had not yet built the house".
  • In the equative case (with added ๐’ถ -gen7), it can mean "as (if)", "as (when)", "when" or "because": e2 in-ล™u2-a-gen7 "as he built the house".
  • It can also host the enclitics -/akanam/ and -/akeลก/ "because": e2 in-ล™u2-a-ka-nam "because he built the house".
  • More surprisingly, it can add both the genitive and the locative morpheme with a meaning close to "when", possibly "as soon as": (e2 in-ล™u2-a-(a-)ka) "as soon as he built the house".

The nominalized clause can directly modify a noun expressing time such as ๐’Œ“ ud "day, time", ๐’ˆฌ mu "year" and ๐’Œ— itid "month", and this in turn can then stand in the locative and ablative in the same meanings as the clauses themselves: ud e2 in-ล™u2-a-a/ta "when/after he built the house". In this case, the particle -bi sometimes precedes the case morpheme: ud e2 in-ล™u2-a-ba; the basic meaning is still of "when".

The nominalized clause can also be included in the various "prepositional constructions" mentioned above:

  • bar e2 in-ล™u2-a-ka "because he built the house" (in Old Sumerian)
  • mu X-a-ลกe3 "because he built the house" (in Neo-Sumerian),
  • egir e2 in-ล™u2-a-ka "after he built the house".

The structure is shown more clearly in the following example:

๐’‚•๐’€€๐’ˆ ๐’Š’๐’€๐’ƒก๐’Š๐’‹ซ
egir a-ma-ru ba-ur3-ra-ta

egir

back

amaru

flood

ba-ur-a-ak-ta

MID-sweep.over-NMLZ-GEN-ABL

egir amaru ba-ur-a-ak-ta

back flood MID-sweep.over-NMLZ-GEN-ABL

"after the Flood had swept over"

Several clauses can be nominalized by a single {-a} enclitic: {kaสพa ba-zaแธซ engar-e nu-i-b-dab-a b-i-n-dug} "he said that the fox had escaped and the farmer had not caught it".

Participles can function in a very similar way to the nominalized clauses and be combined with the same kinds of adjuncts. One peculiarity is that, unlike nominalized clauses, they may also express the agent as a possessor, in the genitive case: ๐’‚๐’†•๐’€€๐’ˆ—๐’†ท e2 ล™u2-a lugal-la "the house built by the king". However, when the head noun (e2) is specified as here, a more common construction uses the ergative: ๐’‚๐’ˆ—๐’‚Š๐’†•๐’€€ e2 lugal-e ล™u2-a.

A special subordinating construction with the temporal meaning of an English when-clause is the so-called pronominal conjugation, which contains a verb nominalized with -/a/ and following possessive pronominal markers referring to the subject (transitive or intransitive). In the 3rd person, the form appears to end in the possessive pronominal marker alone: ๐’†ญ๐’Š๐’‰Œ kur9-ra-ni "when he entered", lit. "his entering", etc. It has been suggested that these forms actually also contain a final directive marker -e; in this example, the analysis would be {kur-a-ni-e}, "at his entering". Similarly, in Old Babylonian Sumerian, one sometimes finds the locative or ablative markers after the possessive (kur9-ra-na, kur9-ra-ni-ta). In contrast, in the 1st and 2nd persons, the 1st and 2nd person pronouns are followed by the syllable ๐’‰ˆ -ne: ๐’ฃ๐’‚ต๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ zig3-ga-gฬƒu10-ne "as I rose"). The verb itself may be in แธซamแนญu, as in the above examples, or in marรป followed by the modal/imperfective suffix -/ed/-: ๐’ฃ๐’ฃ๐’•๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ zi-zi-da-gฬƒu10-ne "when I rise". The same construction is used with the word ๐’€ธ dili "alone": ๐’€ธ๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ dili-gฬƒu10-ne "I alone", etc.

Subordinating conjunctions such as ๐’Œ“๐’• ud-da "when, if", ๐’‹—๐’ƒป๐’Œ‰๐’‡ฒ๐’‰ tukum-bi "if" and ๐’‚—๐’ˆพ en-na "until" also exist.

Coordination

Coordinating conjunctions are rarely used. The most common way to express the sense of "and" is by simple juxtaposition. Nominal phrases may be conjoined, perhaps emphatically, by adding ๐’‰ -bi to the second one: ๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’€ญ๐’Ž๐’†ค๐’‰Œ en-lil2 nin-lil2-bi "both Enlil and Ninlil"; sometimes the enclitic is further reinforced by ๐’• -da "with". More surprisingly, ๐’‹ซ -ta "from" is also sometimes used in the sense of "and". The word ๐’…‡ u3 "and" was borrowed from Akkadian in the Old Akkadian period and occurs mostly in relatively colloquial texts; Old Babylonian Sumerian also borrowed from Akkadian the enclitic ๐’ˆ  -ma "and". There is no conjunction "or" and its sense can also be expressed by simple juxtaposition; a more explicit and emphatic alternative is the repetition of ๐’ƒถ๐’…Ž แธซe2-em, "let it be": ๐’‡ป๐’ƒถ๐’…Ž๐’ˆง๐’ƒถ๐’…Ž udu แธซe2-em maลก แธซe2-em "(be it) a sheep or a goat".

Other issues

A quotative particle -/(e)ลกe/ or -/ลกi/ "saying", variously spelt ๐’‚  -eลกe2, ๐’…† -ลกi or ๐’€ช๐’Šบ -e-ลกe, has been identified. Its use is not obligatory and it is attested only or almost only in texts from the Old Babylonian period or later. Another, rarely attested, particle, ๐’„‘(๐’Šบ)๐’‚— -gฬƒeลก(-ลกe)-en, apparently expresses irrealis modality: "were it that ...".

Highlighting uses of the copula somewhat similar to English cleft constructions are present: ๐’ˆ—๐’€€๐’€ญ๐’‰Œ๐’บ lugal-am3 i3-gฬƒen "It is the king who came", ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’€ธ๐’€€๐’€ญ๐’‰Œ๐’บ a-na-aลก-am3 i3-gฬƒen "Why is it that he came?", ๐’‰Œ๐’บ๐’ˆพ๐’€€๐’€ญ i3-gฬƒen "It is the case that he came".

Sumerian generally links a nominal predicate to the subject using the copula verb, like English. However, it does use zero-copula constructions in some contexts. In interrogative sentences, the 3rd person copula is omitted: ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’ˆฌ๐’ช a-na mu-zu "What is your name?", ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚—๐’ˆฌ๐’ช ne-en mu-zu "Is this your name?". Sumerian proper names that consist of entire sentences normally lack a copula as well, e.g. ๐’€€๐’€๐’€ญ๐’Œ“๐’ถ a-ba dutu-gen7 "Who is like Utu?" As explained above, negative sentences also omit the copula in *nu-am3/nu-um "isn't" and use simply ๐’‰ก nu instead.

Yes/no-interrogative sentences appear to have been marked only by intonation and possibly by resulting lengthening of final vowels. There is no wh-movement to the beginning of the clause, but the interrogative words are placed immediately before the verb: e.g. ๐’ˆ—๐’‚Š๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’€ lugal-e a-na mu-un-ak "What did the king do?", ๐’‚๐’€€๐’€๐’€€๐’…”๐’†• e2a-ba-a in-ล™u3 "Who built the temple?" Two exceptions from this are that the constituent noun of a phrasal verb is normally closer to the verb, and that an interrogative word emphasized with a copula such as ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’€ธ๐’€€๐’€ญ a-na-aลก-am3 "why is it that ...?" is placed at the beginning of the clause. In addition, as already mentioned, interrogative sentences omit the copula where a declarative would have used it.

Word formation

Derivation by affixation is largely non-existent. An exception may be a few nouns ending in -/u/ denoting the object of a corresponding verb: ๐’Šฌ๐’Š’ sar-ru "document" < ๐’Šฌ sar "write". Compounding, on the other hand, is common in nouns. Compounds are normally left-headed. The dependent may be:

  • Another noun: ๐’‚ e2 "house" + ๐’ˆฌ muแธซaldim "cook" > ๐’‚๐’ˆฌ e2-muแธซaldim "kitchen"
  • An adjective: ๐’Œจ ur "dog" + ๐’ˆคmaแธซ "great" > ๐’Œจ๐’ˆค ur-maแธซ "lion"
  • A participle (consisting of the bare verb stem): ๐’ƒป nigฬƒ2 "thing" + ๐’€ ba "give(n)" > ๐’ƒป๐’€ nigฬƒ2-ba "present",
  • A participle with a dependent word: ๐’ƒป nigฬƒ2 "thing" + ๐’ฃ zi "breath" + ๐’…… gฬƒal2 "be there" > ๐’ƒป๐’ฃ๐’…… nigฬƒ2-zi-gฬƒal2 "living thing"

An older obsolete pattern was right-headed instead:

  • ๐’‚ e2 "house" + ๐’Šฎ ลกag4 "heart" > ๐’‚๐’Šฎ e2-ลกag4 "innermost part of a house"
  • ๐’ƒฒ gal "big" + ๐’ˆœ nar "musician" > ๐’ƒฒ๐’ˆœ gal-nar "chief musician"

A participle may be the head of the compound, preceded by a dependent:

  • ๐’พ dub "clay tablet" + ๐’Šฌ sar "write" > ๐’พ๐’Šฌ dub-sar "scribe"
  • ๐’‹— ลกu "hand" + ๐’‹ณ tag "touch" > ๐’‹—๐’‹ณ ลกu-tag "decoration" (corresponding to the phrasal verb ๐’‹—...๐’‹ณ ลกu...tag "decorate")

There are a few cases of nominalized finite verbs, too: ๐’€๐’— ba-uลก4 "(who) has died" > "dead"

Abstract nouns are formed as compounds headed by the word ๐’‰† nam- "fate, status": ๐’Œ‰ dumu "child" > ๐’‰†๐’Œ‰ nam-dumu "childhood", ๐’‹ป tar "cut, decide" > ๐’‰†๐’‹ป nam-tar "fate". Nouns that express the object of an action or an object possessing a characteristic are formed as compounds headed by the word ๐’ƒป nigฬƒ2 "thing": ๐’…ฅ gu4 "eat" > ๐’ƒป๐’…ฅ nigฬƒ2-gu7 "food", ๐’„ญ "good, sweet" > ๐’ƒป๐’„ญ nigฬƒ2-dug "something sweet". The meaning may also be abstract: ๐’‹›...๐’ฒ si...sa2 "straighten, put in order" > nigฬƒ2-si-sa2 "justice". A small number of terms of professions are derived with the preposed element ๐’‰ก nu-: ๐’„‘๐’Šฌ gฬƒeลกkiri6 "garden" > ๐’‰ก๐’„‘๐’Šฌ nu-gฬƒeลกkiri6-(k) "gardener".

Apparent coordinative compounds also exist, e.g. ๐’€ญ๐’†  an-ki "the universe", lit. "heaven and earth".

A noun can be formed from an adjective by conversion: for example, ๐’‚ผ dagฬƒal "wide" also means "width".

On verbs acquiring the properties of adjectives and nouns (agent nouns and action nouns), see the section on Participles.

While new verbs cannot be derived, verbal meanings may be expressed by phrasal verbs (see above); in particular, new phrasal verbs are often formed on the basis of nouns by making them the object of the verbs ๐’…— dug4 "do" or ๐’€ ak "make": ๐’€€...๐’…— a ...dug4, lit. "to do water" > "to irrigate", ๐’„‘๐’‚ต...๐’ฎ gฬƒeลกga-rig2 ...ak, lit. "to do the comb" > "to comb".

Dialects

The standard variety of Sumerian was Emegir (๐’…ด๐’‚ : eme-gir15). A notable variety or sociolect was Emesal (๐’…ด๐’Šฉ: eme-sal), possibly to be interpreted as "fine tongue" or "high-pitched voice". Other apparent terms for registers or dialects were eme-galam "high tongue", eme-si-sa2 "straight tongue", eme-te-na2 "oblique[?] tongue",emesukudda, emesuha, emesidi and emeku. Recently, a regional differentiation into a Northern and a Southern Sumerian dialect area has been posited.

Emesal

Emesal is used exclusively by female characters in some literary texts. In addition, it is dominant in certain genres of cult songs such as the hymns sung by Gala priests. It has been argued that it might have been a female language variety of the kind that exists or has existed in some cultures, such as among the Chukchis and the Garifuna. Alternatively, it has been contended that it must have been originally a regional dialect, since instances of apparent Emesal-like forms are attested in the area of late 3rd millennium Lagash, and some loanwords into Akkadian appear to come from Emesal rather than Emegir. Apart from such isolated glosses, Emesal is first attested in writing in the early Old Babylonian period. It is typically written with syllable signs rather than logograms. A text is often not written consistently in Emesal, but contains apparent Emegir forms as well.

The special features of Emesal are mostly phonological and lexical. In terms of phonology, the following are some of the most common sound correspondences:

Emegir sound Emesal sound Emegir example Emesal example Meaning
gฬƒ (/ล‹/) m ๐’‚ท gฬƒe26 ๐’ˆจ me "I"
d z ๐’‡ป udu ๐’‚Š๐’ข e-ze2 "sheep"
g b ๐’…† igi ๐’„ฟ๐’‰ˆ i-bi2 "eye"
i u ๐’‰บ๐’‡ป sipad ๐’ป๐’€ su8-ba "shepherd"

There are also specifically Emesal lexemes that do not seem to be cognate with their Emegir counterparts, for example:

Emegir Emesal
๐’Ž nin ๐’‚ต๐’Šญ๐’€ญ ga-ลกa-an, later spelling ๐’ƒฝ gaลกan "lady"
๐’€€๐’ˆพ a-na ๐’‹ซ ta "what"
๐’บ tum2 ๐’…• ir "bring"

In grammar, both the cohortative prefix ๐’‚ต ga- and the precative prefix ๐’„ฉ แธซa- are replaced by the morpheme ๐’• da- (with the allomorphs ๐’‰ˆ de3- and ๐’‚… du5- conditioned by context in the same way as that of the corresponding Emegir prefixes).

Southern and Northern Sumerian

Bram Jagersma and Gรกbor Zรณlyomi distinguish two regional dialects of Sumerian: the Southern Sumerian dialect of Lagash, Umma, Ur and Uruk, which eventually formed the basis for the common standard of the Neo-Sumerian (Ur III) period, and the Northern Sumerian dialect as seen in texts from Nippur, Adab, Isin and Shuruppak (although eventually texts in the standard variety begin to be produced in that area as well). The differences that he finds between the two varieties are:

  • In Southern Sumerian, the conjugation prefix ๐’‰Œ /i/- alternated with ๐’‚Š /e/- in accordance with vowel harmony during the Old Sumerian period, while Northern Sumerian only had /i/-. Later Southern Sumerian generalized /i/- as well.
  • In Southern Sumerian, the conjugation prefix expressing the passive was ๐’€ ba-, while in Northern Sumerian, it was ๐’€€ a-.
  • In Southern Sumerian after the Old Akkadian period, the conjugation prefix ๐’€€ a-, which had originally existed in both dialects, disappears entirely apart from the variant ๐’€  al-, which only appears in subordinate clauses.
  • In Southern Sumerian, the Old Sumerian phoneme ล™ merged with r, while in Northern Sumerian, it merged with d.

Old Babylonian Sumerian

The dominant Sumerian variety of the Old Babylonian period, in turn, reflected a different regional dialect from the standard Neo-Sumerian of the Ur III period:

  • Neo-Sumerian elides the conjugation prefixes ๐’‰Œ /i/- and ๐’€€ /a/- in front of the prefixes ๐’‰Œ-/ni/-, ๐’Š -/ra/- and ๐’Š‘ -/ri/-, while Old Babylonian Sumerian retains them.
  • The original sequence ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š mu-e-, consisting of the ventive conjugation prefix ๐’ˆฌ mu- and the 2nd person prefix ๐’‚Š -e-, is contracted into ๐’ˆฌ /muห/ in the Ur III standard, but into ๐’ˆจ /meห/ in the most common Old Babylonian variety.
  • In general, Old Babylonian Sumerian preserved many features of Northern Sumerian, in contrast to the decidedly Southern character of the Ur III standard. This is doubtlessly connected to the fact that the centre of power in Babylonia moved to the north. In particular, it uses spellings that show that its reflex of the Old Sumerian ล™ phoneme is /d/.

Interference from Akkadian and other late phenomena

In the Old Babylonian period and after it, the Sumerian used by scribes was influenced by their mother tongue, Akkadian, and sometimes more generally by imperfect acquisition of the language. As a result, various deviations from its original structure occur in texts or copies of texts from these times. The following effects have been found in the Old Babylonian period:

  • confusion of the animate and inanimate gender, resulting in use of incorrect gender pronouns;
  • occasional use of the animate plural -ene with inanimates;
  • occasional use of the directive case marker -/e/ with animates;
  • changes in the use of the nominal case markers so as to parallel the use of Akkadian prepositions, whereas the verbal case markers remain unchanged, resulting in mismatches between nominal and verbal case;
  • generalized use of terminative -/ลกe/ to express direction, displacing locative -/a/ as the expression of illative and sublative meanings ("into" and "onto") and directive -/e/ as the expression of achieving contiguity with something;
  • treatment of the prefix sequences /b/-/i/- and /n/-/i/-, which originally could mark the causee in transitive verbs, as causative markers even with intransitive verbs;
  • dropping of final -/m/ in the copula -/am/ and sometimes its replacement with -/e/;
  • occurrence of -/e/ as a marรป 3rd person singular marker even in intransitive verbs;
  • occurrence of -/n/- as a transitive subject prefix in forms with a 1st (and, rarely, also 2nd) person ergative participant;
  • occurrence of pre-stem pronominal prefixes in แธซamแนญu referring to an intransitive subject;
  • occasional incorporation of the constituent noun of the phrasal verb into the verb stem: e.g. ki-agฬƒ2 or ki ...ki-agฬƒ2 instead of ki ...agฬƒ2 "to love";
  • confusion of the locative case (-/a/) and the directive case (-/e/), as well as the various prefix-case combinations;
  • occasional use of the ergative/directive ending -/e/ instead of the genitive case marker -/a(k)/.

For Middle Babylonian and later texts, additional deviations have been noted:

  • loss of the contrast between the phonemes g (/g/) and gฬƒ (/ล‹/), with the latter merging into the former, and use of the signs for g also for words with original gฬƒ
  • omission of the ergative marker -/e/ and apparent loss of the notion of an ergative case;
  • use of ๐’†ค -ke4, originally expressing a sequence of the genitive marker -/ak/ and the ergative marker -/e/, simply as a marker of the genitive, equivalent to -/a(k)/ alone;
  • use of the ablative -/ta/ instead of the locative -/a/;
  • omission of the genitive marker -/a(k)/;
  • use of infrequent words, sometimes inappropriately, apparently extracted from lexical lists.
  • use of Emesal forms in non-Emesal contexts: e.g. /umun/ "lord" and /gaลกan/ "lady" (instead of ๐’‚— en and ๐’Ž nin), moreover written with the innovated logograms ๐’Œ‹ and ๐’ƒฝ, respectively.

Syllabary

The table below shows signs used for simple syllables of the form CV or VC. As used for the Sumerian language, the cuneiform script was in principle capable of distinguishing at least 16 consonants, transliterated as

b, d, g, gฬƒ, แธซ, k, l, m, n, p, r, ล™, s, ลก, t, z

as well as four vowel qualities, a, e, i, u.

image
Sale of a number of fields, probably from Isin, c.โ€‰2600 BC.
Sumerian CV and VC syllabic glyphs
Ca Ce Ci Cu aC eC iC uC
a ๐’€€,

รก ๐’€‰

e ๐’‚Š,

รฉ ๐’‚

i ๐’„ฟ,

รญ=Iร ๐’Š,
รฌ=NI ๐’‰Œ

u ๐’Œ‹,

รบ ๐’Œ‘,
รน ๐’…‡

a ๐’€€,

รก ๐’€‰

e ๐’‚Š,

รฉ ๐’‚

i ๐’„ฟ,

รญ=Iร ๐’Š,
รฌ=NI ๐’‰Œ

u ๐’Œ‹,

รบ ๐’Œ‘,
รน ๐’…‡

b- ba ๐’€,

bรก=PA ๐’‰บ,
bร =Eล  ๐’Œ

be=BAD ๐’,

bรฉ=BI ๐’‰,
bรจ=NI ๐’‰Œ

bi ๐’‰,

bรญ=NE ๐’‰ˆ,
bรฌ=PI ๐’‰ฟ

bu ๐’,

bรบ=KASKAL ๐’†œ,
bรน=Pร™ ๐’…ค

ab ๐’€Š,

รกb ๐’€–

eb=IB ๐’…,

รฉb=TUM ๐’Œˆ

ib ๐’…,

รญb=TUM ๐’Œˆ

ub ๐’Œ’,

รบb=ล รˆ ๐’‚ 

-b
d- da ๐’•,

dรก=TA ๐’‹ซ

de=DI ๐’ฒ,

dรฉ ๐’Œฃ,
dรจ=NE ๐’‰ˆ

di ๐’ฒ,

dรญ=Tร ๐’„ญ

du ๐’บ,

dรบ=TU ๐’Œ…,
dรน=GAG ๐’†•,
du4=TUM ๐’Œˆ

ad ๐’€œ,

รกd ๐’„‰

ed=ร ๐’€‰ id=ร ๐’€‰,

รญd=A.ENGUR ๐’€€๐’‡‰

ud ๐’Œ“,

รบd=รล  ๐’€พ

-d
g- ga ๐’‚ต,

gรก ๐’‚ท

ge=GI ๐’„€,

gรฉ=KID ๐’†ค,
gรจ=DIล  ๐’น

gi ๐’„€,

gรญ=KID ๐’†ค,
gรฌ=DIล  ๐’น,
gi4 ๐’„„,
gi5=KI ๐’† 

gu ๐’„–,

gรบ ๐’„˜,
gรน=KA ๐’…—,
gu4 ๐’„ž,
gu5=KU ๐’†ช,
gu6=NAG ๐’…˜,
gu7 ๐’…ฅ

ag ๐’€,

รกg ๐’‰˜

eg=IG ๐’……,

รฉg=E ๐’‚Š

ig ๐’……,

รญg=E ๐’‚Š

ug ๐’ŠŒ -g
แธซ- แธซa ๐’„ฉ,

แธซรก=แธชI.A ๐’„ญ๐’€€,
แธซร =U ๐’Œ‹,
แธซa4=แธชI ๐’„ญ

แธซe=แธชI ๐’„ญ,

แธซรฉ=GAN ๐’ƒถ

แธซi ๐’„ญ,

แธซรญ=GAN ๐’ƒถ

แธซu ๐’„ท aแธซ ๐’„ด,

รกแธซ=ล Eล  ๐’‹€

eแธซ=Aแธช ๐’„ด iแธซ=Aแธช ๐’„ด uแธซ=Aแธช ๐’„ด,

รบแธซ ๐’Œ”

-แธซ
k- ka ๐’…—,

kรก ๐’†,
kร =GA ๐’‚ต

ke=KI ๐’† ,

kรฉ=GI ๐’„€

ki ๐’† ,

kรญ=GI ๐’„€

ku ๐’†ช/๐’‚ ,

kรบ=GU7๐’…ฅ,
kรน ๐’†ฌ,
ku4 ๐’†ญ

ak=AG ๐’€ ek=IG ๐’…… ik=IG ๐’…… uk=UG ๐’ŠŒ -k
l- la ๐’†ท,

lรก=LAL ๐’‡ฒ,
lร =NU ๐’‰ก

le=LI ๐’‡ท,

lรฉ=NI ๐’‰Œ

li ๐’‡ท,

lรญ=NI ๐’‰Œ

lu ๐’‡ป,

lรบ ๐’‡ฝ

al ๐’€ ,

รกl=ALAM ๐’€ฉ

el ๐’‚–,

รฉl=IL ๐’…‹

il ๐’…‹,

รญl ๐’…

ul ๐’ŒŒ,

รบl=NU ๐’‰ก

-l
m- ma ๐’ˆ ,

mรก ๐’ˆฃ

me ๐’ˆจ,

mรฉ=MI ๐’ˆช,
mรจ ๐’€ž/๐’… 

mi ๐’ˆช,

mรญ=MUNUS ๐’Šฉ,
mรฌ=ME ๐’ˆจ

mu ๐’ˆฌ,

mรบ=SAR ๐’Šฌ

am ๐’„ /๐’‚”,

รกm=รG ๐’‰˜

em=IM ๐’…Ž im ๐’…Ž,

รญm=KAล 4๐’ฝ

um ๐’Œ,

รบm=UD ๐’Œ“

-m
n- na ๐’ˆพ,

nรก ๐’ˆฟ,
nร =AG ๐’€,
na4 ("NI.UD") ๐’‰Œ๐’Œ“

ne ๐’‰ˆ,

nรฉ=NI ๐’‰Œ

ni ๐’‰Œ,

nรญ=IM ๐’‰Ž

nu ๐’‰ก,

nรบ=Nร ๐’ˆฟ

an ๐’€ญ en ๐’‚—,

รฉn ๐’‹™๐’€ญ,
รจn=LI ๐’‡ท

in ๐’…”,

in4=EN ๐’‚—,
in5=NIN ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ†

un ๐’Œฆ,

รบn=U ๐’Œ‹

-n
p- pa ๐’‰บ,

pรก=BA ๐’€,
pร =PAD3๐’…†๐’Š’

pe=PI ๐’‰ฟ,

pรฉ=BI ๐’‰

pi ๐’‰ฟ,

pรญ=BI ๐’‰,
pรฌ=BAD ๐’

pu=BU ๐’,

pรบ=TรšL ๐’‡ฅ,
pรน ๐’…ค

ap=AB ๐’€Š ep=IB ๐’…,

รฉp=TUM ๐’Œˆ

ip=IB ๐’…,

รญp=TUM ๐’Œˆ

up=UB ๐’Œ’,

รบp=ล รˆ ๐’‚ 

-p
r- ra ๐’Š,

rรก=DU ๐’บ

re=RI ๐’Š‘,

rรฉ=URU ๐’Œท,
rรจ=LAGAB ๐’†ธ

ri ๐’Š‘,

rรญ=URU ๐’Œท
rรฌ=LAGAB ๐’†ธ

ru ๐’Š’,

rรบ=GAG ๐’†•,
rรน=Aล  ๐’€ธ

ar ๐’…ˆ,

รกr=UB ๐’Œ’

er=IR ๐’…• ir ๐’…•,

รญr=A.IGI ๐’€€๐’…†

ur ๐’Œจ,

รบr ๐’Œซ

-r
s- sa ๐’Š“,

sรก=DI ๐’ฒ,
sร =ZA ๐’,
sa4 ("แธชU.Nร") ๐’„ท๐’ˆพ

se=SI ๐’‹›,

sรฉ=ZI ๐’ฃ

si ๐’‹›,

sรญ=ZI ๐’ฃ

su ๐’‹ข,

sรบ=ZU ๐’ช,
sรน=SUD ๐’‹ค,
su4 ๐’‹œ

as=AZ ๐’Š es=GIล  ๐’„‘,

รฉs=Eล  ๐’‚ 

is=GIล  ๐’„‘,

รญs=Eล  ๐’‚ 

us=UZ ๐’Šป,

รบs=Uล  ๐’‘,
usโ‚… ๐’‡‡

-s
ลก- ลกa ๐’Šญ,

ลกรก=NรG ๐’ผ,
ลกร  ๐’Šฎ

ลกe ๐’Šบ,

ลกรฉ,
ลกรจ ๐’‚ 

ลกi=IGI ๐’…†,

ลกรญ=SI ๐’‹›

ลกu ๐’‹—,

ลกรบ ๐’‹™,
ลกรน=ล รˆ ๐’‚ ,
ลกu4=U ๐’Œ‹

aลก ๐’€ธ,

รกลก ๐’€พ

eลก ๐’Œ/๐’,

รฉลก=ล รˆ ๐’‚ 

iลก ๐’…–,

รญลก=KASKAL ๐’†œ

uลก ๐’‘,

รบลก=BAD ๐’

-ลก
t- ta ๐’‹ซ,

tรก=DA ๐’•

te ๐’‹ผ,

tรฉ=Tร ๐’Šน

ti ๐’‹พ,

tรญ ๐’Šน,
tรฌ=DIM ๐’ด,
ti4=DI ๐’ฒ

tu ๐’Œ…,

tรบ=UD ๐’Œ“,
tรน=DU ๐’บ

at=AD ๐’€œ,

รกt=GรR gunรป ๐’„‰

et=ร ๐’€‰ it=ร ๐’€‰ ut=UD ๐’Œ“,

รบt=รล  ๐’€พ

-t
z- za ๐’,

zรก=NA4๐’‰Œ๐’Œ“

ze=ZI ๐’ฃ,

zรฉ=Zร ๐’ข

zi ๐’ฃ,

zรญ ๐’ข,
zรฌ ๐’ฅ

zu ๐’ช,

zรบ=KA ๐’…—

az ๐’Š ez=GIล  ๐’„‘,

รฉz=Eล  ๐’‚ 

iz= GIล  ๐’„‘,

รญz=Iล  ๐’…–

uz=ล E&HU ๐’Šป

รบz=Uล  ๐’‘,
รนz ๐’š

-z
gฬƒ- gฬƒรก=Gร ๐’‚ท gฬƒe26=Gร ๐’‚ท gฬƒi6=MI ๐’ˆช gฬƒu10=MU ๐’ˆฌ รกgฬƒ=รG ๐’‰˜ รจgฬƒ=รG ๐’‰˜ รฌgฬƒ=รG ๐’‰˜ รนgฬƒ=UN ๐’Œฆ -gฬƒ
ล™- ล™รก=DU ๐’บ ล™e6=DU ๐’บ -ล™

Sample text

Inscription by Entemena of Lagaลก

This text was inscribed on a small clay cone c.โ€‰2400ย BC. It recounts the beginning of a war between the city-states of Lagaลก and Umma during the Early Dynastic III period, one of the earliest border conflicts recorded. (RIME 1.09.05.01)

image
Cone of Enmetena, king of Lagash, Room 236 Reference AO 3004, Louvre Museum.
I.1โ€“7

๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค

den-lil2

๐’ˆ—

lugal

๐’†ณ๐’†ณ๐’Š

kur-kur-ra

๐’€Š๐’€

ab-ba

๐’€ญ๐’€ญ๐’Œท๐’‰ˆ๐’†ค

digฬƒir-digฬƒir-re2-ne-ke4

๐’…—

inim

๐’„€๐’ˆพ๐’‰Œ๐’‹ซ

gi-na-ni-ta

๐’€ญ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ†๐’„ˆ๐’‹ข

dnin-gฬƒir2-su

๐’€ญ๐’‡‹๐’‰

dลกara2-bi

๐’† 

ki

๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ๐’‹ฉ

e-ne-sur

๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค ๐’ˆ— ๐’†ณ๐’†ณ๐’Š ๐’€Š๐’€ ๐’€ญ๐’€ญ๐’Œท๐’‰ˆ๐’†ค ๐’…— ๐’„€๐’ˆพ๐’‰Œ๐’‹ซ ๐’€ญ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ†๐’„ˆ๐’‹ข ๐’€ญ๐’‡‹๐’‰ ๐’†  ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ๐’‹ฉ

den-lil2 lugal kur-kur-ra ab-ba digฬƒir-digฬƒir-re2-ne-ke4 inim gi-na-ni-ta dnin-gฬƒir2-su dลกara2-bi ki e-ne-sur

"Enlil, king of all the lands, father of all the gods, by his firm command, fixed the border between Ningirsu and ล ara."

8โ€“12

๐’ˆจ๐’ฒ

me-silim

๐’ˆ—

lugal

๐’†ง๐’† ๐’†ค

kiลกki-ke4

๐’…—

inim

๐’€ญ๐’…—๐’ฒ๐’ˆพ๐’‹ซ

diลกtaran-na-ta

๐’‚ 

eลก2

๐’ƒท

gana2

๐’‰๐’Š

be2-ra

๐’† ๐’€

ki-ba

๐’ˆพ

na

๐’‰ˆ๐’†•

bi2-ล™u2

๐’ˆจ๐’ฒ ๐’ˆ— ๐’†ง๐’† ๐’†ค ๐’…— ๐’€ญ๐’…—๐’ฒ๐’ˆพ๐’‹ซ ๐’‚  ๐’ƒท ๐’‰๐’Š ๐’† ๐’€ ๐’ˆพ ๐’‰ˆ๐’†•

me-silim lugal kiลกki-ke4 inim diลกtaran-na-ta eลก2 gana2 be2-ra ki-ba na bi2-ล™u2

"Mesilim, king of Kiลก, at the command of Iลกtaran, measured the field and set up a stele there."

13โ€“17

๐’‘

uลก

๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹›

ensi2

๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’†ค

ummaki-ke4

๐’‰†

nam

๐’…—๐’ˆ 

inim-ma

๐’‹›๐’€€๐’‹›๐’€€๐’‚ 

dirig-dirig-ลกe3

๐’‚Š๐’€

e-ak

๐’‘ ๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’†ค ๐’‰† ๐’…—๐’ˆ  ๐’‹›๐’€€๐’‹›๐’€€๐’‚  ๐’‚Š๐’€

uลก ensi2 ummaki-ke4 nam inim-ma dirig-dirig-ลกe3 e-ak

"Ush, ruler of Umma, acted unspeakably."

18โ€“21

๐’ˆพ๐’†•๐’€€๐’‰

na-ru2-a-bi

๐’‰Œ๐’‰ป

i3-pad

๐’‚”

edin

๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’† ๐’‚ 

lagaลกki-ลกe3

๐’‰Œ๐’บ

i3-gฬƒen

๐’ˆพ๐’†•๐’€€๐’‰ ๐’‰Œ๐’‰ป ๐’‚” ๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’† ๐’‚  ๐’‰Œ๐’บ

na-ru2-a-bi i3-pad edin lagaลกki-ลกe3 i3-gฬƒen

"He ripped out that stele and marched toward the plain of Lagaลก."

22โ€“27

๐’€ญ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ†๐’„ˆ๐’‹ข

dnin-gฬƒir2-su

๐’Œจ๐’Š•

ur-sag

๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’‡ฒ๐’†ค

den-lil2-la2-ke4

๐’…—

inim

๐’‹›๐’ฒ๐’‰Œ๐’‹ซ

si-sa2-ni-ta

๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’•

ummaki-da

๐’ฎ๐’„ฉ๐’Š

dam-แธซa-ra

๐’‚Š๐’•๐’€

e-da-ak

๐’€ญ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ†๐’„ˆ๐’‹ข ๐’Œจ๐’Š• ๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’‡ฒ๐’†ค ๐’…— ๐’‹›๐’ฒ๐’‰Œ๐’‹ซ ๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’• ๐’ฎ๐’„ฉ๐’Š ๐’‚Š๐’•๐’€

dnin-gฬƒir2-su ur-sag den-lil2-la2-ke4 inim si-sa2-ni-ta ummaki-da dam-แธซa-ra e-da-ak

"Ningirsu, warrior of Enlil, at his just command, made war with Umma."

28โ€“31

๐’…—

inim

๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’‡ฒ๐’‹ซ

den-lil2-la2-ta

๐’Š“

sa

๐’Œ‹

ลกu4

๐’ƒฒ

gal

๐’‰ˆ๐’Œ‹

bi2-ลกu4

๐’…–๐’‡ฏ๐’‹บ๐’‰

SAแธชAR.DU6.TAKA4-bi

๐’‚”๐’ˆพ

eden-na

๐’† 

ki

๐’€๐’‰Œ๐’‘๐’‘

ba-ni-us2-us2

๐’…— ๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’‡ฒ๐’‹ซ ๐’Š“ ๐’Œ‹ ๐’ƒฒ ๐’‰ˆ๐’Œ‹ ๐’…–๐’‡ฏ๐’‹บ๐’‰ ๐’‚”๐’ˆพ ๐’†  ๐’€๐’‰Œ๐’‘๐’‘

inim den-lil2-la2-ta sa ลกu4 gal bi2-ลกu4 SAแธชAR.DU6.TAKA4-bi eden-na ki ba-ni-us2-us2

"At Enlil's command, he threw his great battle net over it and heaped up burial mounds for it on the plain."

32โ€“38

๐’‚๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ๐’บ

e2-an-na-tum2

๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹›

ensi2

๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’† 

lagaลกki

๐’‰บ๐’„‘๐’‰‹๐’‚ต

pa-bil3-ga

๐’‚—๐’‹ผ๐’ˆจ๐’ˆพ

en-mete-na

๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹›

ensi2

๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’† ๐’…—๐’†ค

lagaลกki-ka-ke4

๐’‚๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ๐’บ ๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’†  ๐’‰บ๐’„‘๐’‰‹๐’‚ต ๐’‚—๐’‹ผ๐’ˆจ๐’ˆพ ๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’† ๐’…—๐’†ค

e2-an-na-tum2 ensi2 lagaลกki pa-bil3-ga en-mete-na ensi2 lagaลกki-ka-ke4

"Eannatum, ruler of Lagash, uncle of Entemena, ruler of Lagaลก"

39โ€“42

๐’‚—๐’€‰๐’†—๐’‡ท

en-a2-kal-le

๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹›

ensi2

๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’•

ummaki-da

๐’† 

ki

๐’‚Š๐’•๐’‹ฉ

e-da-sur

๐’‚—๐’€‰๐’†—๐’‡ท ๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’• ๐’†  ๐’‚Š๐’•๐’‹ฉ

en-a2-kal-le ensi2 ummaki-da ki e-da-sur

"fixed the border with Enakale, ruler of Umma"

See also

  • List of languages by first written accounts
  • Pennsylvania Sumerian Dictionary
  • Sumerian literature
  • Descent of Inanna into the Underworld

References

Notes

  1. Also written ๐’…ด๐’„€ eme-gi.
  2. Interestingly, the poorly documented Sealand Dynasty (c. 1732โ€“1460 BC), which ruled in a region in Southern Mesopotamia corresponding to historical Sumer, appears to have particularly favoured Sumerian; Sumerian school documents from that time were found at Tell Khaiber, some of which contain year names from the reign of a king with the Sumerian throne name Aya-dara-galama.
  3. For words occurring in this article, proposed revised readings based on Old Babylonian lexical lists are ambar > abbar, banลกur > bansur, daแธซ > taแธซ, diลก > deลก, eden > edin, gig2 > geg2, imin > umun7, inim > enim, lagaลก > lagas, nigฬƒin > nigฬƒen, ninda > inda, sa4 > ลกe21, ugu2 > aagu2, and zaแธซ3 > saแธซ7.
  4. Since Akkadian, too, had developed aspiration in the realization of its voiceless (non-emphatic) consonants by that time, that aspiration was also preserved after the extinction of Sumerian, in Akkadian native speakers' pronunciation of the language, and is hence reflected even in Ancient Greek transcriptions of Sumerian words with the letters ฯ†, ฮธ and ฯ‡.
  5. Another, relatively uncommon opinion based on loanwords to and from Old Akkadian is that it was actually a voiceless dental fricative /ฮธ/ as in think or a sound similar to it.
  6. Above all, two different signs for the syllable /ne/, which are systematically used in different morphemes, sometimes alternate so that a contraction with a following vowel /e/ causes the replacement of ๐’‰Œ ne2 by ๐’‰ˆ ne: ne2 */ne/ + */e/ > ne */neห/. The suspected long /eห/ also seems to be resistant to apocope and assimilation which are undergone by the suspected short /e/.
  7. Some frequent words considered to contain long vowels based on borrowings into or from Akkadian are ๐’†น ambฤr "marsh", ๐’€ญ ฤn "sky", ๐’„‘๐’Ž gฬƒeลกbanลกลซr, ๐’“ bลซr "vessel", ๐’ฎ๐’ƒผ dam-gฤr3 "merchant", ๐’‚ ฤ“2 (from earlier /haj/) "house", ๐’‚Š ฤ“g2 "levee", ๐’‚— ฤ“n "highpriest", ๐’„€ gฤซn6 "firm, true", ๐’‹ผ๐’€€ kฤr "harbour", ๐’†ค kฤซd "reed mat", ๐’ˆœ nฤr "musician", ๐’‰ฃ nลซn "prince", ๐’Š• sฤgฬƒ "head", ๐’‰ช๐’• ลกฤ“r7-da "crime" and ๐’ฃ zฤซd "right". Among grammatical morphemes, length has been posited with greater or lesser confidence for the nominal plural marker ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ -enฤ“, the 3rd person singular animate pronoun ๐’€€๐’‰ˆ a-nฤ“ or ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ e-nฤ“, the 1st, 2nd and 3rd person plural possessive enclitics ๐’ˆจ -mฤ“, ๐’ช๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ -zu-nฤ“-nฤ“ and ๐’€€๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ -a-nฤ“-nฤ“, the 1st, 2nd and 3rd person plural verbal prefixes ๐’ˆจ -mฤ“-, ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ -e-nฤ“- and ๐’‰ˆ -nnฤ“-, the ablative ๐’‹ซ -tฤ, the prospective prefix ๐’…‡ -ลซ3 (but shortened and qualitatively assimilated in an open syllable), the affirmative prefix ๐’ˆพ nฤ- and the 1st and 2nd person pronouns ๐’‚ท gฬƒฤ“26 and ๐’ข zฤ“2 in position before the enclitic copula ๐’ˆจ -me-.
  8. In particular, the verbs ๐’Š’ ru "lay down", ๐’‹ฉ sur "produce fluid", ๐’ƒก ur3 "drag", and ๐’Œด ur4 "pluck" take open-vowel prefixes; and the verbs ๐’Œฃ de2 "pour", ๐’‚Š e "do, say", ๐’‡ฏ๐’บ ed3 "go out", ๐’†Ÿ keลก2(d) "bind", and ๐’…Š se12 "live/dwell (plural)" take close-vowel prefixes.
  9. This is most consistent with stops. With other consonants, there is some vacillation depending on the consonant, the following vowel, the relevant morpheme, the time period and the region; overall, sonorants favour doubling more than fricatives (especially sibilants) and affricates do, /a/ favours it more than /e/, and doubling is more extensive in Old Sumerian than in subsequent periods.
  10. Nonetheless, some Sumerologists also posit genuine geminate consonants in Sumerian, as exemplified later in the article, but orthographic doubling as seen above usually is not sufficient to se predict its presence.
  11. Here and in the following, the first line in the interlinear glosses shows a cuneiform spelling of a Sumerian word, phrase or sentence, the second line (in a small font) shows the way in which that spelling is conventionally transliterated into the Latin alphabet, the third one (in italics) shows a segmentation of the Sumerian phrases into morphemes, the fourth one contains a gloss for each of the morphemes, and the fifth one displays a translation into English.
  12. The initial vowel /e/ appears only after a consonant and is absent after a vowel. Jagersma believes that it contracts with a preceding vowel, while lengthening it. In Old Babylonian Sumerian, spellings suggesting such assimilation are found: ๐’‡ฝ๐’…‡๐’‰ˆ lu2-u3-ne "men".
  13. As is generally the case with the vowel -/e/, the vowel of the ergative ending can contract with a preceding vowel, lengthening it: lu2-e > ๐’‡ฝ๐’…‡ lu2-u3 "man (erg.)". In early texts, the length of the vowel isn't marked at all, leaving the ending with no reflection in the spelling.
  14. According to Jagersma, this is a tendency due to semantic reasons, but not a strict rule of the language.
  15. Also known traditionally as the "locative-terminative". It has been pointed out that the term "directive" is misleading, since this Sumerian case simply expresses contiguity, which may or may not be the result of movement in a certain direction. Based on its meaning, it could be called adessive, but it can also express the destination of a movement, making the meaning allative. Similarly, the Sumerian locative expresses internal location both as a stative condition (inessive meaning) or as the result of a movement (illative meaning).
  16. With animates, the dative is usually used instead.
  17. The final consonant /k/ appears only in front of a following vowel (in the spelling, and at least by Ur III times in pronunciation as well); see the section on Consonants above for this phenomenon. Thus, we find ๐’ˆ—๐’†ท lugal-la for {lugal-ak} "of the king", but ๐’ˆ—๐’†ท๐’„ฐ lugal-la-kam for {lugal-ak-am} "(it) is of the king". Moreover, if /k/ is preserved, the preceding vowel often seems to be omitted at least in writing, especially after /l/, /m/, /n/, /r/, /s/, /ลก/ and /แธซ/: ๐’ˆ—๐’„ฐ lugal-kam. Conversely, the initial vowel /a/ of the genitive marker appears to be dropped or assimilated after a preceding stem-final vowel in content words: e.g. {dumu-ak} is written simply ๐’Œ‰ dumu, presumably standing for */dumu(k)/. The same appears to happen after the plural marker ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ -e-ne and the plural possessive pronominal enclitics ๐’ˆจ -me "our", ๐’ช๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ -zu-ne-ne "your (pl.)" and (๐’€€/๐’‚Š)๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ -a/e-ne-ne "their", so that the sequences of these morphemes and the genitive end in -/e(k)/. However, there is some disagreement on the treatment of content words and the nature of the whole process; see the following footnote on this matter. Finally, the genitive marker occasionally seems to be simply omitted in writing, especially after a fricative.
  18. In front of the vowel /a/ of the genitive marker -/ak/ and the locative marker /a/, the possessive pronominal enclitics ๐’ˆฌ -gฬƒu10 "my", ๐’ช -zu "your (sing.)", ๐’‰Œ -ni "his/her" and ๐’‰-bi "its" are contracted and/or assimilated, so that they appear as ๐’‚ท -gฬƒa2, ๐’ -za, ๐’ˆพ -na and ๐’€ -ba, respectively. In contrast, these case markers do not cause the loss of the final /e/ in the plural marker ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ -e-ne and in the plural possessive pronominal enclitics ๐’ˆจ -me "our", ๐’ช๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ -zu-ne-ne "your (pl.)" and (๐’€€/๐’‚Š)๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ -a/e-ne-ne "their". In the case of the genitive, the -/a/ of the case marker is elided instead, so that the genitive sequence ends in -/e(k)/. There is some evidence that the stem-final vowel was also dropped in some content words under unclear circumstances, but that this was obscured by the spelling. With respect to the genitive, Jagersma tentatively suggests and Zรณlyomi (2017: 42-43) concurs that the variation in both content words and enclitics was determined by vowel length: a preceding short vowel generally assimilated to the /a/ and the product was a long /aห/, whereas a preceding long vowel (as in the plural marker, which they believe to have been pronounced -/eneห/) caused dropping of the following /a/.
  19. The allomorph -/r/ is used after vowels. In early texts, it may not be expressed at all. Alternatively, the alternation may be ignored in the spelling, so that -ra is written even after vowels. Additionally, in the Ur III period, -a may occur instead of -ra after possessive pronominal enclitics or the genitive marker.
  20. With inanimates, the directive is usually used instead.
  21. The meaning is not necessarily "up to" or "until" as with a terminative case, but rather expresses a general direction, so this case could have been called .
  22. The allomorph -/ลก/ is used after vowels. In early texts, it may not be expressed graphically at all. Alternatively, the alternation may be ignored in the spelling, so that -ลกe3 is written even after vowels.
  23. Although the marker is never written with a sign for VC, it seems likely that there was an allomorph -/d/ used after vowels, leading to the dative marker remaining unwritten in this position in early texts.
  24. Unlike the Indo-European locative cases, the Sumerian locative can express not only a static location, but also the direction of a movement; the key feature is that the spatial meaning is inessive ("in") or superessive ("on").
  25. Jagersma believes that, like the nominalizing enclitic, this marker originally began in a glottal stop (/ส”a/). The glottal stop, in his view, later assimilated to the preceding consonant and caused it to be geminated.
  26. With animates, the corresponding case in some constructions is the dative.
  27. With animates, the construction ๐’† ...(๐’€€)๐’‹ซ /ki X-a(k)-ta/, lit. "from the place of X" is used.
  28. The substance someone fills something with is in the absolutive.
  29. The variant with /e/ is found in Old Babylonian and has a few attestations in Ur III Neo-Sumerian.
  30. The initial /a/ is present after consonants (albeit not always written, especially in earlier periods), but contracts with a preceding vowel.
  31. The inanimate has no number distinction, so ๐’‰ -bi can mean both "its" and "their".
  32. The forms /menden/ or /me/ for "we" and /menzen/ for "you (pl.)" are only attested in Sumero-Akkadian lexical lists and, in the case of /mende(n)/, in an Old Babylonian literary text. Two of them seem to consist of the enclitic copula conjugated in the corresponding person and number ("(who) we are", "(who) you (pl.) are"). Another form given in lexical lists is ๐’๐’‚Š๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— za-e-me-en-ze2-en, clearly a combination of the personal plural you (sing.) and the 2nd person plural form of the copula. For these reasons, their authenticity is considered dubious.
  33. The forms /menden/ or /me/ for "we" and /menzen/ for "you (pl.)" are only attested in Sumero-Akkadian lexical lists and, in the case of /mende(n)/, in an Old Babylonian literary text. Two of them seem to consist of the enclitic copula conjugated in the corresponding person and number ("(who) we are", "(who) you (pl.) are"). Another form given in lexical lists is ๐’๐’‚Š๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— za-e-me-ze2-en, clearly a combination of the personal plural "you" (sing.) and the 2nd person plural form of the copula. For these reasons, their authenticity is considered dubious.
  34. The variant with /e/ is found in Old Babylonian and has a few attestations in Ur III Neo-Sumerian.
  35. The initial /a/ is present after consonants (albeit not always written, especially in earlier periods), but contracts with a preceding vowel.
  36. It has been ascribed a more contrastive nuance "this (as opposed to others)".
  37. Jagersma considers the correct reading of the sign ๐’‰ bi in the possessive/demonstrative enclitic to be be2.
  38. These variants are generally not used as counting words, but rather as adjectives meaning "single", "alone" and the like, but there are some indications that they might have functioned as numerals in very early periods or occasionally.
  39. With a long vowel due to the origin from a contraction according to Jagersma.
  40. The earliest attestation of these terms is from the Middle Babylonian period. The original Sumerian terms may have been ๐’†ธ lugud2 "short" and ๐’ gid2 "long".
  41. As a first stage in this development, Jagersma reconstructs a prehistoric Sumerian system where /a/- signalled imperfectivity and /i/- perfectivity, before the marรป-แธซamแนญu tense-aspect distinction took over that role. แธซamแนญu forms with /a/- were interpreted as statives, increasingly marginalised in the South, but given a new additional function in the North as early as the Fara period texts (Jagersma 2010: 548-549).
  42. The common denominator is that these sequences begin in a single consonant, which makes the syllable containing /u/ an open syllable. As already seen with a number of other prefixes above, assimilation generally happens in open syllables and not in closed ones. For example, no assimilation happens in the sequence /mu-n-ลกi-/.
  43. In particular, this is shown by the fact that sequences like {ba-n-ลกi-} and {ba-n-da-} are possible in attested Sumerian (even though {ba-b-ลกi-} and {ba-b-da-} remain impossible because of the origin of ba-).
  44. It has been claimed that the reflexive object may also be direct in some cases
  45. It has been claimed by some that the marker on the noun can also be omitted when the corresponding verb prefix expresses the same meaning, but this has been interpreted as a purely graphical phenomenon.
  46. Also -e- in some Old Babylonian texts. Note that -e-, too, had a tendency to assimilate to the preceding vowel.
  47. Among other things, the assumption of a geminate allomorph -nn- explains the fact that the finite prefix /i/- occurs in front of the dative prefix sequence written ๐’ˆพ -na- and the directive prefix sequence written ๐’‰Œ -ni-. This would have been unexpected if -n- were a single consonant, because /i/- otherwise never appears in front of a single consonant (unless it is the stem-initial one). It also explains why /mu-/ is sometimes assimilated before the locative ({mu-ni-} mi-ni-), but never before the personal prefix followed by the directive ({mu-nn-i}) mu-ni-/mu-un-ni-.
  48. The 1st person plural dative marker, like the corresponding singular, seems to include the ventive prefix (Jagersma 2010: 390, 410).
  49. Only attested in late texts. For the dative and the directive, the singular form {-r-} is sometimes used with plural reference as well (resulting in {-r-a-} and {-r-i-}, respectively), and this is sometimes combined with the plural suffix {-enzen}, which otherwise normally refers only to subjects and direct objects. This may be an Old Babylonian innovation.
  50. However, the plural pronominal markers usually don't take the dative marker and never take the directive marker; intead, they express a dative or directive participant on their own (although there are some attestations of the expected /-ne-a/ and /-me-a/ from the Ur III period and Old Babylonian periods.
  51. The allomorph -di3- is used before the locative prefix /-ni-/).) The variant ๐’‰ˆ de3 / ๐’‰ˆ ๐’‹ผ de4, found in Old Babylonian Sumerian, is the result of the contraction of -da- and a following -e-, but sometimes also seems to occur because of assimilation to a preceding' -e-: /ba-e-da-/ > /ba-e-de-/.
  52. Thomsen and Foxvog believe that there is also an allomorph /-ra-/ used between vowels. Jagersma (2010) generally assumes idiosyncratic case use in such cases.
  53. The allomorph -ra- is used after vowels.
  54. However, the plural pronominal markers usually don't take the dative marker and never take the directive marker; intead, they express a dative or directive participant on their own (although there are some attestations of the expected /-ne-a/ and /-me-a/ from the Ur III period and Old Babylonian periods.
  55. According to Jagersma (2010: 476-482) and Zรณlyomi (2017: 206, 215), the allomorph -i- is used after consonant, while -e- is used after vowels. In the latter case, -e- may be assimilated to the preceding vowel, while the vowel undergoes compensatory lengthening: ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š mu-e- > ๐’ˆฌ๐’…‡ mu-u3- etc. In Old Babylonian Sumerian, it is the preceding vowel that assimilated to -e-: ๐’•๐’‚Š -da-e- > ๐’‰ˆ de3 The prefix does not seem to surface at all between a vowel and a subject/object prefix as in ma2-a mu-na-*(e)-n-gฬƒar "he loaded it on the boat for her". This restricts the possibilities of the co-occurrence of directive forms and forces the grammar to choose which participant to express: e.g. the dative prefixes and ba- take precedence over the inanimate directive -b-i, while there is vacillation in the choice between prioritizing it or the locative (Jagersma 2010: 442-444).
  56. The locative prefix is unique in that it is never attached to a pronominal prefix, but rather combines in itself the pronominal and dimensional meanings, meaning "there" or "in there".
  57. For this reason, it appears that a directive participant is sometimes untypically cross-referenced with a dative prefix in order to allow the locative to also occur in the verb form (/b-i-/, but /b-a-ni-/).
  58. Zรณlyomi (2017: 201-222) refers to the "in(to)", "on(to)" and "at" constructions as "locative1", "locative2" and "locative3", respectively. Jagersma (2010: 416-428) refers to the "at" construction as the "oblique object".
  59. Occasional exceptions from this restriction occur only in Old Babylonian texts (Jagersma 2010: 509).
  60. In Old Babylonian texts, -e- for the 1st person singular may occur, making it identical with the 2nd person singular just as they are identical in the suffixes, but this may be the result of a late analogy (Edzard 2003: 87, cf. Michalowski 2007).
  61. A significant minority of Sumerologists believe that the prefixes of the 1st and 2nd person are /-en-/ rather than /-V-/ and /-e-/ when they stand for the object (i.e. in marรป). That would be indistinguishable in writing (and even possibly, according to some, also in speech) from the 3rd person animate -n-.
  62. A significant minority of Sumerologists believe that the prefixes of the 1st and 2nd person are /-en-/ rather than /-e-/ when they stand for the object (i.e. in marรป); that would often be indistinguishable from the 3rd person animate -n-.
  63. The inanimate agreement marker has no number distinction.
  64. According to several researchers, -/b/- as a direct object marker may be absent under conditions that are not entirely clear; in particular, several verbs such as ๐’Œฃ de2 "pour", ๐’†• ล™u2 "build", ๐’ƒป gฬƒar "put" and ๐’‚Š e "say" very often (but not always) lack it.

Sumerian Sumerian ๐’…ด๐’‚  romanized eme gir15 lit native language was the language of ancient Sumer It is one of the oldest attested languages dating back to at least 2900 BC It is a local language isolate that was spoken in ancient Mesopotamia in the area that is modern day Iraq Sumerian๐’…ด๐’‚  eme gir15Native toSumer and AkkadRegionMesopotamia modern day Iraq EraAttested from c 2900 BC Went out of vernacular use around 1700 BC used as a classical language until about 100 AD Language familyLanguage isolateDialectsEmesal Southern Sumerian Northern SumerianWriting systemSumero Akkadian cuneiformLanguage codesISO 639 2 span class plainlinks sux span ISO 639 3 a href https iso639 3 sil org code sux class extiw title iso639 3 sux sux a Linguist ListugaGlottologsume1241This article contains IPA phonetic symbols Without proper rendering support you may see question marks boxes or other symbols instead of Unicode characters For an introductory guide on IPA symbols see Help IPA Akkadian a Semitic language gradually replaced Sumerian as the primary spoken language in the area c 2000 BC the exact date is debated but Sumerian continued to be used as a sacred ceremonial literary and scientific language in Akkadian speaking Mesopotamian states such as Assyria and Babylonia until the 1st century AD Thereafter it seems to have fallen into obscurity until the 19th century when Assyriologists began deciphering the cuneiform inscriptions and excavated tablets that had been left by its speakers In spite of its extinction Sumerian exerted a significant influence on the languages of the area The cuneiform script originally used for Sumerian was widely adopted by numerous regional languages such as Akkadian Elamite Eblaite Hittite Hurrian Luwian and Urartian it similarly inspired the Old Persian alphabet which was used to write the eponymous language The influence was perhaps the greatest on Akkadian whose grammar and vocabulary were significantly influenced by Sumerian StagesThis proto literate tablet c 3100 2900 BC records the transfer of a piece of land Walters Art Museum Baltimore The first known Sumerian Akkadian bilingual tablet dates from the reign of Rimush Louvre Museum AO 5477 The top half is in Sumerian the bottom half is its translation in Akkadian The history of written Sumerian can be divided into several periods Proto literate period c 3100 BC to c 3000 BC Archaic Sumerian c 3000 BC to c 2500 BC Old or Classical Sumerian c 2500 BC to c 2350 BC Old Akkadian Sumerian c 2350 2200 BC Neo Sumerian c 2200 BC to c 2000 BC further divided into Early Neo Sumerian Lagash II period c 2200 BC to c 2100 BC Late Neo Sumerian Ur III period c 2100 BC to c 2000 BC Old Babylonian Sumerian c 2000 BC to c 1600 BC Post Old Babylonian Sumerian after c 1600 BC The pictographic writing system used during the Proto literate period 3200 BC 3000 BC corresponding to the Uruk III and Uruk IV periods in archeology was still so rudimentary that there remains some scholarly disagreement about whether the language written with it is Sumerian at all although it has been argued that there are some albeit still very rare cases of phonetic indicators and spelling that show this to be the case The texts from this period are mostly administrative there are also a number of sign lists which were apparently used for the training of scribes The next period Archaic Sumerian 3000 BC 2500 BC is the first stage of inscriptions that indicate grammatical elements so the identification of the language is certain It includes some administrative texts and sign lists from Ur c 2800 BC Texts from Shuruppak and Abu Salabikh from 2600 to 2500 BC the so called Fara period or Early Dynastic Period IIIa are the first to span a greater variety of genres including not only administrative texts and sign lists but also incantations legal and literary texts including proverbs and early versions of the famous works The Instructions of Shuruppak and The Kesh temple hymn However the spelling of grammatical elements remains optional making the interpretation and linguistic analysis of these texts difficult The Old Sumerian period 2500 2350 BC is the first one from which well understood texts survive It corresponds mostly to the last part of the Early Dynastic period ED IIIb and specifically to the First Dynasty of Lagash from where the overwhelming majority of surviving texts come The sources include important royal inscriptions with historical content as well as extensive administrative records Sometimes included in the Old Sumerian stage is also the Old Akkadian period c 2350 BC c 2200 BC during which Mesopotamia including Sumer was united under the rule of the Akkadian Empire At this time Akkadian functioned as the primary official language but texts in Sumerian primarily administrative did continue to be produced as well The first phase of the Neo Sumerian period corresponds to the time of Gutian rule in Mesopotamia the most important sources come from the autonomous Second Dynasty of Lagash especially from the rule of Gudea which has produced extensive royal inscriptions The second phase corresponds to the unification of Mesopotamia under the Third Dynasty of Ur which oversaw a renaissance in the use of Sumerian throughout Mesopotamia using it as its sole official written language There is a wealth of texts greater than from any preceding time besides the extremely detailed and meticulous administrative records there are numerous royal inscriptions legal documents letters and incantations In spite of the dominant position of written Sumerian during the Ur III dynasty it is controversial to what extent it was actually spoken or had already gone extinct in most parts of its empire Some facts have been interpreted as suggesting that many scribes and even the royal court actually used Akkadian as their main spoken and native language On the other hand evidence has been adduced to the effect that Sumerian continued to be spoken natively and even remained dominant as an everyday language in Southern Babylonia including Nippur and the area to its south By the Old Babylonian period c 2000 c 1600 BC Akkadian had clearly supplanted Sumerian as a spoken language in nearly all of its original territory whereas Sumerian continued its existence as a liturgical and classical language for religious artistic and scholarly purposes In addition it has been argued that Sumerian persisted as a spoken language at least in a small part of Southern Mesopotamia Nippur and its surroundings at least until about 1900 BC and possibly until as late as 1700 BC Nonetheless it seems clear that by far the majority of scribes writing in Sumerian in this point were not native speakers and errors resulting from their Akkadian mother tongue become apparent For this reason this period as well as the remaining time during which Sumerian was written are sometimes referred to as the Post Sumerian period The written language of administration law and royal inscriptions continued to be Sumerian in the undoubtedly Semitic speaking successor states of Ur III during the so called Isin Larsa period c 2000 BC c 1750 BC The Old Babylonian Empire however mostly used Akkadian in inscriptions sometimes adding Sumerian versions The Old Babylonian period especially its early part has produced extremely numerous and varied Sumerian literary texts myths epics hymns prayers wisdom literature and letters In fact nearly all preserved Sumerian religious and wisdom literature and the overwhelming majority of surviving manuscripts of Sumerian literary texts in general can be dated to that time and it is often seen as the classical age of Sumerian literature Conversely far more literary texts on tablets surviving from the Old Babylonian period are in Sumerian than in Akkadian even though that time is viewed as the classical period of Babylonian culture and language However it has sometimes been suggested that many or most of these Old Babylonian Sumerian texts may be copies of works that were originally composed in the preceding Ur III period or earlier and some copies or fragments of known compositions or literary genres have indeed been found in tablets of Neo Sumerian and Old Sumerian provenance In addition some of the first bilingual Sumerian Akkadian lexical lists are preserved from that time although the lists were still usually monolingual and Akkadian translations did not become common until the late Middle Babylonian period and there are also grammatical texts essentially bilingual paradigms listing Sumerian grammatical forms and their postulated Akkadian equivalents After the Old Babylonian period or according to some as early as 1700 BC the active use of Sumerian declined Scribes did continue to produce texts in Sumerian at a more modest scale but generally with interlinear Akkadian translations and only part of the literature known in the Old Babylonian period continued to be copied after its end around 1600 BC During the Middle Babylonian period approximately from 1600 to 1000 BC the Kassite rulers continued to use Sumerian in many of their inscriptions but Akkadian seems to have taken the place of Sumerian as the primary language of texts used for the training of scribes and their Sumerian itself acquires an increasingly artificial and Akkadian influenced form In some cases a text may not even have been meant to be read in Sumerian instead it may have functioned as a prestigious way of encoding Akkadian via Sumerograms cf Japanese kanbun Nonetheless the study of Sumerian and copying of Sumerian texts remained an integral part of scribal education and literary culture of Mesopotamia and surrounding societies influenced by it and it retained that role until the eclipse of the tradition of cuneiform literacy itself in the beginning of the Common Era The most popular genres for Sumerian texts after the Old Babylonian period were incantations liturgical texts and proverbs among longer texts the classics Lugal e and An gim were most commonly copied Of the 29 royal inscriptions of the late second millennium BC 2nd dynasty of Isin about half were in Sumerian described as hypersophisticated classroom Sumerian ClassificationSumerian is a language isolate At one time when it was widely held to be an Indo European language but that view has been almost universally rejected Since decipherment began in the early 20th century scholars have tried to relate Sumerian to a wide variety of languages Because of its prestige as the first attested written language proposals for linguistic affinity often have a nationalistic flavour Attempts have been made without success to link Sumerian with a range of widely disparate groups such as Indo European Austroasiatic Dravidian Uralic Sino Tibetan and Turkic the last being promoted by Turkish nationalists as part of the Sun language theory Additionally long range proposals have attempted to include Sumerian in broad macrofamilies often including other notable isolates like Basque or small families like Koreanic Such proposals enjoy virtually no support among modern linguists Sumerologists and Assyriologists and are typically seen as fringe theories due to their unverifiability It has also been suggested that the Sumerian language descended from a late prehistoric creole language However no conclusive evidence beyond a handful of typological features can be found to support this view A more widespread hypothesis posits a Proto Euphratean language family that preceded Sumerian in Mesopotamia and exerted an areal influence on it especially in the form of polysyllabic words that appear un Sumerian making them suspect of being loanwords and are not traceable to any other known language family There is little speculation as to the affinities of this hypothetical substratum language or these languages and it is thus best treated as unclassified Other researchers disagree with the assumption of a single substratum language and argue that several languages are involved A related proposal by Gordon Whittaker is that the language of the proto literary texts from the Late Uruk period c 3350 3100 BC is really an early extinct branch of Indo European language which he terms Euphratic which somehow emerged long prior to the accepted timeline for the spread of Indo European into West Asia though this is rejected by mainstream opinion which accepts Sumerian as a language isolate Writing systemThis section does not cite any sources Please help improve this section by adding citations to reliable sources Unsourced material may be challenged and removed May 2022 Learn how and when to remove this message Development Letter sent by the high priest Lu enna to the king of Lagash maybe Urukagina informing him of his son s death in combat c 2400 BC found in Telloh ancient Girsu Vase of Entemena king of Lagash with dedication Louvre AO2674 c 2400 BC Pictographic proto writing was used starting in c 3300 BC It is unclear what underlying language it encoded if any By c 2800 BC some tablets began using syllabic elements that clearly indicated a relation to the Sumerian language Around 2600 BC cuneiform symbols were developed using a wedge shaped stylus to impress the shapes into wet clay This cuneiform wedge shaped mode of writing co existed with the proto cuneiform archaic mode Deimel 1922 lists 870 signs used in the Early Dynastic IIIa period 26th century In the same period the large set of logographic signs had been simplified into a logosyllabic script comprising several hundred signs Rosengarten 1967 lists 468 signs used in Sumerian pre Sargonian Lagash The cuneiform script was adapted to Akkadian writing beginning in the mid third millennium Over the long period of bi lingual overlap of active Sumerian and Akkadian usage the two languages influenced each other as reflected in numerous loanwords and even word order changes Transliteration Depending on the context a cuneiform sign can be read either as one of several possible logograms each of which corresponds to a word in the Sumerian spoken language as a phonetic syllable V VC CV or CVC or as a determinative a marker of semantic category such as occupation or place See the article Cuneiform Some Sumerian logograms were written with multiple cuneiform signs These logograms are called diri spellings after the logogram ๐’‹›๐’€€ DIRI which is written with the signs ๐’‹› SI and ๐’€€ A The text transliteration of a tablet will show just the logogram such as the word dirig not the separate component signs Not all epigraphists are equally reliable and before publication of an important treatment of a text scholars will often arrange to collate the published transliteration against the actual tablet to see if any signs especially broken or damaged signs should be represented differently Our knowledge of the readings of Sumerian signs is based to a great extent on lexical lists made for Akkadian speakers where they are expressed by means of syllabic signs The established readings were originally based on lexical lists from the Neo Babylonian Period which were found in the 19th century in the 20th century earlier lists from the Old Babylonian Period were published and some researchers in the 21st century have switched to using readings from them There is also variation in the degree to which so called Auslauts or amissable consonants morpheme final consonants that stopped being pronounced at one point or another in the history of Sumerian are reflected in the transliterations This article generally used the versions with expressed Auslauts HistoriographyThis section needs additional citations for verification Please help improve this article by adding citations to reliable sources in this section Unsourced material may be challenged and removed December 2023 Learn how and when to remove this message Sumero Akkadian cuneiform syllabaryLeft Sumero Akkadian cuneiform syllabary used by early Akkadian rulers Right Seal of Akkadian Empire ruler Naram Sin reversed for readability c 2250 BC The name of Naram Sin Akkadian ๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ๐’Š๐’„ ๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’ช DNa ra am DSin Sin being written ๐’‚—๐’ช EN ZU appears vertically in the right column British Museum The key to reading logosyllabic cuneiform came from the Behistun inscription a trilingual cuneiform inscription written in Old Persian Elamite and Akkadian In a similar manner the key to understanding Egyptian hieroglyphs was the bilingual Greek and Egyptian with the Egyptian text in two scripts Rosetta stone and Jean Francois Champollion s transcription in 1822 In 1838 Henry Rawlinson building on the 1802 work of Georg Friedrich Grotefend was able to decipher the Old Persian section of the Behistun inscriptions using his knowledge of modern Persian When he recovered the rest of the text in 1843 he and others were gradually able to translate the Elamite and Akkadian sections of it starting with the 37 signs he had deciphered for the Old Persian Meanwhile many more cuneiform texts were coming to light from archaeological excavations mostly in the Semitic Akkadian language which were duly deciphered By 1850 however Edward Hincks came to suspect a non Semitic origin for cuneiform Semitic languages are structured according to consonantal forms whereas cuneiform when functioning phonetically was a syllabary binding consonants to particular vowels Furthermore no Semitic words could be found to explain the syllabic values given to particular signs Julius Oppert suggested that a non Semitic language had preceded Akkadian in Mesopotamia and that speakers of this language had developed the cuneiform script In 1855 Rawlinson announced the discovery of non Semitic inscriptions at the southern Babylonian sites of Nippur Larsa and Uruk In 1856 Hincks argued that the untranslated language was agglutinative in character The language was called Scythic by some and confusingly Akkadian by others In 1869 Oppert proposed the name Sumerian based on the known title King of Sumer and Akkad reasoning that if Akkad signified the Semitic portion of the kingdom Sumer might describe the non Semitic annex Credit for being first to scientifically treat a bilingual Sumerian Akkadian text belongs to Paul Haupt who published Die sumerischen Familiengesetze The Sumerian family laws in 1879 Ernest de Sarzec began excavating the Sumerian site of Tello ancient Girsu capital of the state of Lagash in 1877 and published the first part of Decouvertes en Chaldee with transcriptions of Sumerian tablets in 1884 The University of Pennsylvania began excavating Sumerian Nippur in 1888 A Classified List of Sumerian Ideographs by R Brunnow appeared in 1889 The bewildering number and variety of phonetic values that signs could have in Sumerian led to a detour in understanding the language a Paris based orientalist Joseph Halevy argued from 1874 onward that Sumerian was not a natural language but rather a secret code a cryptolect and for over a decade the leading Assyriologists battled over this issue For a dozen years starting in 1885 Friedrich Delitzsch accepted Halevy s arguments not renouncing Halevy until 1897 Francois Thureau Dangin working at the Louvre in Paris also made significant contributions to deciphering Sumerian with publications from 1898 to 1938 such as his 1905 publication of Les inscriptions de Sumer et d Akkad Charles Fossey at the College de France in Paris was another prolific and reliable scholar His pioneering Contribution au Dictionnaire sumerien assyrien Paris 1905 1907 turns out to provide the foundation for P Anton Deimel s 1934 Sumerisch Akkadisches Glossar vol III of Deimel s 4 volume Sumerisches Lexikon In 1908 Stephen Herbert Langdon summarized the rapid expansion in knowledge of Sumerian and Akkadian vocabulary in the pages of Babyloniaca a journal edited by Charles Virolleaud in an article Sumerian Assyrian Vocabularies which reviewed a valuable new book on rare logograms by Bruno Meissner Subsequent scholars have found Langdon s work including his tablet transcriptions to be not entirely reliable In 1944 the Sumerologist Samuel Noah Kramer provided a detailed and readable summary of the decipherment of Sumerian in his Sumerian Mythology Friedrich Delitzsch published a learned Sumerian dictionary and grammar in the form of his Sumerisches Glossar and Grundzuge der sumerischen Grammatik both appearing in 1914 Delitzsch s student Arno Poebel published a grammar with the same title Grundzuge der sumerischen Grammatik in 1923 and for 50 years it would be the standard for students studying Sumerian Another highly influential figure in Sumerology during much of the 20th century was Adam Falkenstein who produced a grammar of the language of Gudea s inscriptions Poebel s grammar was finally superseded in 1984 on the publication of The Sumerian Language An Introduction to its History and Grammatical Structure by While there are various points in Sumerian grammar on which Thomsen s views are not shared by most Sumerologists today Thomsen s grammar often with express mention of the critiques put forward by Pascal Attinger in his 1993 Elements de linguistique sumerienne La construction de du11 e di dire is the starting point of most recent academic discussions of Sumerian grammar More recent monograph length grammars of Sumerian include Dietz Otto Edzard s 2003 Sumerian Grammar and Bram Jagersma s 2010 A Descriptive Grammar of Sumerian currently digital but soon when to be printed in revised form by Oxford University Press Piotr Michalowski s essay entitled simply Sumerian in the 2004 The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World s Ancient Languages has also been recognized as a good modern grammatical sketch There is relatively little consensus even among reasonable Sumerologists in comparison to the state of most modern or classical languages Verbal morphology in particular is hotly disputed In addition to the general grammars there are many monographs and articles about particular areas of Sumerian grammar without which a survey of the field could not be considered complete The primary institutional lexical effort in Sumerian is the Pennsylvania Sumerian Dictionary project begun in 1974 In 2004 the PSD was released on the Web as the ePSD The project is currently supervised by Steve Tinney It has not been updated online since 2006 but Tinney and colleagues are working on a new edition of the ePSD a working draft of which is available online PhonologyAssumed phonological and morphological forms will be between slashes and curly brackets respectively with plain text used for the standard Assyriological transcription of Sumerian Most of the following examples are unattested Note also that not unlike most other pre modern orthographies Sumerian cuneiform spelling is highly variable so the transcriptions and the cuneiform examples will generally show only one or at most a few common graphic forms out of many that may occur Spelling practices have also changed significantly in the course of the history of Sumerian the examples in the article will use the most phonetically explicit spellings attested which usually means Old Babylonian or Ur III period spellings except where an authentic example from another period is used Modern knowledge of Sumerian phonology is flawed and incomplete because of the lack of speakers the transmission through the filter of Akkadian phonology and the difficulties posed by the cuneiform script As I M Diakonoff observes when we try to find out the morphophonological structure of the Sumerian language we must constantly bear in mind that we are not dealing with a language directly but are reconstructing it from a very imperfect mnemonic writing system which had not been basically aimed at the rendering of morphophonemics Consonants Early Sumerian is conjectured to have had at least the consonants listed in the table below The consonants in parentheses are reconstructed by some scholars based on indirect evidence if they existed they were lost around the Ur III period in the late 3rd millennium BC Sumerian consonant phonemes Bilabial Alveolar Postalveolar Velar GlottalNasal m m n n ล‹ g Plosive plain p b t d k g ส” aspirated pสฐ p tสฐ t kสฐ k Fricative s s สƒ s x แธซ h h Affricate plain t s z aspirated t sสฐ r dr Approximant l l j Tap ษพ r a simple distribution of six stop consonants in three places of articulation originally distinguished by aspiration In the late 3rd millennium BC the unaspirated stops are thought to have become voiced in most positions although not word finally whereas the voiceless aspirated stops maintained their aspiration p voiceless aspirated bilabial plosive t voiceless aspirated alveolar plosive k voiceless aspirated velar plosive As a rule the voiceless aspirated consonants p t and k did not occur word finally b voiceless unaspirated bilabial plosive later voiced d voiceless unaspirated alveolar plosive later voiced g voiceless unaspirated velar plosive later voiced a phoneme usually represented by r sometimes written dr which became d or r in northern and southern dialects respectively after the Old Akkadian period It was first reconstructed as a voiced alveolar tap ษพ but Bram Jagersma argues that it was a voiceless aspirated alveolar affricate because of its reflection in loanwords in Akkadian among other reasons and this view is accepted by Gabor Zolyomi 2017 28 Other suggestions that have been made is that r was a voiceless alveolar tap a simple distribution of three nasal consonants in similar distribution to the stops m bilabial nasal n alveolar nasal g frequently printed ฤ due to typesetting constraints increasingly transcribed as ล‹ ล‹ likely a velar nasal as in sing it has also been argued to be a labiovelar nasal ล‹สท or a nasalized labiovelar a set of three sibilants s likely a voiceless alveolar fricative z likely a voiceless unaspirated alveolar affricate t s as shown by Akkadian loans from s t s to Sumerian z In early Sumerian this would have been the unaspirated counterpart to r Like the stop series b d and g it is thought to have become voiced dz in some positions in the late 3rd millennium s generally described as a voiceless postalveolar fricative สƒ as in ship แธซ a velar fricative x sometimes written lt h gt two liquid consonants l a lateral consonant r a rhotic consonant which Jagersma argues was realized as a tap ษพ because of various evidence suggesting its phonetic similarity to t and d The existence of various other consonants has been hypothesized based on graphic alternations and loans though none have found wide acceptance For example Diakonoff lists evidence for two lateral phonemes two rhotics two back fricatives and two g sounds excluding the velar nasal and assumes a phonemic difference between consonants that are dropped word finally such as the g in ๐’  zag gt za3 and consonants that remain such as the g in ๐’†ท๐’€ lag Other hidden consonant phonemes that have been suggested include semivowels such as j and w and a glottal fricative h or a glottal stop that could explain the absence of vowel contraction in some words though objections have been raised against that as well A recent descriptive grammar by Bram Jagersma includes j h and ส” as unwritten consonants with the glottal stop even serving as the first person pronominal prefix However these unwritten consonants had been lost by the Ur III period according to Jagersma Very often a word final consonant was not expressed in writing and was possibly omitted in pronunciation so it surfaced only when followed by a vowel for example the k of the genitive case ending ak does not appear in ๐’‚๐’ˆ—๐’†ท e2 lugal la the king s house but it becomes obvious in ๐’‚๐’ˆ—๐’†ท๐’„ฐ e2 lugal la kam it is the king s house compare liaison in French Jagersma believes that the lack of expression of word final consonants was originally mostly a graphic convention but that in the late 3rd millennium voiceless aspirated stops and affricates pสฐ tสฐ kสฐ and tsสฐ were indeed gradually lost in syllable final position as were the unaspirated stops d and ษก Vowels The vowels that are clearly distinguished by the cuneiform script are a e i and u Various researchers have posited the existence of more vowel phonemes such as o and even ษ› and ษ” which would have been concealed by the transmission through Akkadian as that language does not distinguish them That would explain the seeming existence of numerous homophones in transliterated Sumerian as well as some details of the phenomena mentioned in the next paragraph These hypotheses are not yet generally accepted Phonemic vowel length has also been posited by many scholars based on vowel length in Sumerian loanwords in Akkadian occasional so called plene spellings with extra vowel signs and some internal evidence from alternations However scholars who believe in the existence of phonemic vowel length do not consider it possible to reconstruct the length of the vowels in most Sumerian words During the Old Sumerian period the southern dialects those used in the cities of Lagash Umma Ur and Uruk which also provide the overwhelming majority of material from that stage exhibited a vowel harmony rule based on vowel height or advanced tongue root Essentially prefixes containing e or i appear to alternate between e in front of syllables containing open vowels and i in front of syllables containing close vowels e g ๐’‚Š๐’ฝ e kas4 he runs but ๐’‰Œ๐’บ i3 gub he stands Certain verbs with stem vowels spelt with u and e however seem to take prefixes with a vowel quality opposite to the one that would have been expected according to this rule which has been variously interpreted as an indication either of the existence of additional vowel phonemes in Sumerian or simply of incorrectly reconstructed readings of individual lexemes The 3rd person plural dimensional prefix ๐’‰ˆ ne is also unaffected which Jagersma believes to be caused by the length of its vowel In addition some have argued for a second vowel harmony rule There also appear to be many cases of partial or complete assimilation of the vowel of certain prefixes and suffixes to one in the adjacent syllable reflected in writing in some of the later periods and there is a noticeable albeit not absolute tendency for disyllabic stems to have the same vowel in both syllables These patterns too are interpreted as evidence for a richer vowel inventory by some researchers For example we find forms like ๐’‚ต๐’ฝ ga kas4 let me run but from the Neo Sumerian period onwards occasional spellings like ๐’„˜๐’ˆฌ๐’Š๐’€Š๐’‹ง gu2 mu ra ab sum2 let me give it to you According to Jagersma these assimilations are limited to open syllables and as with vowel harmony Jagersma interprets their absence as the result of vowel length or of stress in at least some cases There is evidence of various cases of elision of vowels apparently in unstressed syllables in particular an initial vowel in a word of more than two syllables seems to have been elided in many cases What appears to be vowel contraction in hiatus aa ia ua gt a ae gt a ie gt i or e ue gt u or e etc is also very common There is some uncertainty and variance of opinion as to whether the result in each specific case is a long vowel or whether a vowel is simply replaced deleted Syllables could have any of the following structures V CV VC CVC More complex syllables if Sumerian had them are not expressed as such by the cuneiform script Stress Sumerian stress is usually presumed to have been dynamic since it seems to have caused vowel elisions on many occasions Opinions vary on its placement As argued by Bram Jagersma and confirmed by other scholars the adaptation of Akkadian words of Sumerian origin seems to suggest that Sumerian stress tended to be on the last syllable of the word at least in its citation form The treatment of forms with grammatical morphemes is less clear Many cases of apheresis in forms with enclitics have been interpreted as entailing that the same rule was true of the phonological word on many occasions i e that the stress could be shifted onto the enclitics however the fact that many of these same enclitics have allomorphs with apocopated final vowels e g se s suggests that they were on the contrary unstressed when these allomorphs arose It has also been conjectured that the frequent assimilation of the vowels of non final syllables to the vowel of the final syllable of the word may be due to stress on it However a number of suffixes and enclitics consisting of e or beginning in e are also assimilated and reduced In earlier scholarship somewhat different views were expressed and attempts were made to formulate detailed rules for the effect of grammatical morphemes and compounding on stress but with inconclusive results Based predominantly on patterns of vowel elision Adam Falkenstein argued that stress in monomorphemic words tended to be on the first syllable and that the same applied without exception to reduplicated stems but that the stress shifted onto the last syllable in a first member of a compound or idiomatic phrase onto the syllable preceding a final suffix enclitic and onto the first syllable of the possessive enclitic ani In his view single verbal prefixes were unstressed but longer sequences of verbal prefixes attracted the stress to their first syllable Jagersma has objected that many of Falkenstein s examples of elision are medial and so while the stress was obviously not on the medial syllable in question the examples do not show where it was Joachim Krecher attempted to find more clues in texts written phonetically by assuming that geminations plene spellings and unexpected stronger consonant qualities were clues to stress placement Using this method he confirmed Falkenstein s views that reduplicated forms were stressed on the first syllable and that there was generally stress on the syllable preceding a final suffix enclitic on the penultimate syllable of a polysyllabic enclitic such as ani zunene etc on the last syllable of the first member of a compound and on the first syllable in a sequence of verbal prefixes However he found that single verbal prefixes received the stress just as prefix sequences did and that in most of the above cases another stress often seemed to be present as well on the stem to which the suffixes enclitics were added on the second compound member in compounds and possibly on the verbal stem that prefixes were added to or on following syllables He also did not agree that the stress of monomorphemic words was typically initial and believed to have found evidence of words with initial as well as with final stress in fact he did not even exclude the possibility that stress was normally stem final Pascal Attinger has partly concurred with Krecher but doubts that the stress was always on the syllable preceding a suffix enclitic and argues that in a prefix sequence the stressed syllable wasn t the first one but rather the last one if heavy and the next to the last one in other cases Attinger has also remarked that the patterns observed may be the result of Akkadian influence either due to linguistic convergence while Sumerian was still a living language or since the data comes from the Old Babylonian period a feature of Sumerian as pronounced by native speakers of Akkadian The latter has also been pointed out by Jagersma who is in addition sceptical about the very assumptions underlying the method used by Krecher to establish the place of stress Orthography Sumerian writing expressed pronunciation only roughly It was often morphophonemic so much of the allomorphic variation could be ignored Especially in earlier Sumerian coda consonants were also often ignored in spelling e g mung ares they put it here could be written ๐’ˆฌ๐’ƒป๐’Œท mu g ar re2 The use of VC signs for that purpose producing more elaborate spellings such as ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ƒป๐’Œท๐’Œ mu un g ar re2 es3 became more common only in the Neo Sumerian and especially in the Old Babylonian period Conversely an intervocalic consonant especially at the end of a morpheme followed by a vowel initial morpheme was usually repeated by the use of a CV sign for the same consonant e g ๐’Šฌ sar write ๐’Šฌ๐’Š sar ra written This results in orthographic gemination that is usually reflected in Sumerological transliteration but does not actually designate any phonological phenomenon such as length It is also relevant in this context that as explained above many morpheme final consonants seem to have been elided unless followed by a vowel at various stages in the history of Sumerian These are traditionally termed Auslauts in Sumerology and may or may not be expressed in transliteration e g the logogram ๐’Šฎ for sag gt sa g heart may be transliterated as sag4 or as sa3 Thus when the following consonant appears in front of a vowel it can be said to be expressed only by the next sign for example ๐’Šฎ๐’‚ต sag4 ga in the heart can also be interpreted as sa3 ga Of course when a CVC sound sequence is expressed by a sequence of signs with the sound values CV VC that does not necessarily indicate a long vowel or a sequence of identical vowels either To mark such a thing so called plene writings with an additional vowel sign repeating the preceding vowel were used although that never came to be done systematically A typical plene writing involved a sequence such as C V V VC CV e g ๐’‚ผ๐’€€ ama a for amaa lt ama e the mother ergative case Sumerian texts vary in the degree to which they use logograms or opt for syllabic phonetic spellings instead e g the word ๐’ƒป g ar put may also be written phonetically as ๐’‚ท๐’…ˆ g a2 ar They also vary in the degree to which allomorphic variation was expressed e g ๐’€๐’„„๐’Œ ba gi4 es or ๐’€๐’„„๐’…– ba gi4 is for they returned While early Sumerian writing was highly logographic there was a tendency towards more phonetic spelling in the Neo Sumerian period Consistent syllabic spelling was employed when writing down the Emesal dialect since the usual logograms would have been read in Emegir by default for the purpose of teaching the language and often in recording incantations As already mentioned texts written in the Archaic Sumerian period are difficult to interpret because they often omit grammatical elements and determinatives In addition many literary mythological texts from that period use a special orthographic style called UD GAL NUN which seems to be based on substitution of certain signs or groups of signs for others For example the three signs ๐’Œ“ UD ๐’ƒฒ GAL and ๐’‰ฃ NUN which the system is named for are substituted for ๐’€ญ AN ๐’‚— EN and ๐’†ค LIL2 respectively producing the name of the god den lil2 The motivation for this practice is mysterious it has been suggested that it was a kind of cryptography Texts written in UD GAL NUN are still understood very poorly and only partially GrammarEver since its decipherment research of Sumerian has been made difficult by the relative sparseness of linguistic data the apparent lack of a closely related language and the features of the writing system A further oft mentioned and paradoxical problem for the study of Sumerian is that the most numerous and varied texts written in the most phonetically explicit and precise orthography are only dated to periods when the scribes themselves were no longer native speakers and often demonstrably had less than perfect command of the language they were writing in conversely for much of the time during which Sumerian was still a living language the surviving sources are few unvaried and or written in an orthography that is more difficult to interpret Typologically Sumerian is classified as an agglutinative ergative consistently so in its nominal morphology and split ergative in its verbal morphology and subject object verb language Nominal morphology Noun phrases The Sumerian noun is typically a one or two syllable root ๐’…† igi eye ๐’‚ e2 house household ๐’Ž nin lady although there are also some roots with three syllables like ๐’† ๐’‡ด sakanka market There are two semantically predictable grammatical genders which have traditionally been called animate and inanimate although these names do not express their membership exactly as explained below The adjectives and other modifiers follow the noun ๐’ˆ—๐’ˆค lugal maแธซ great king The noun itself is not inflected rather grammatical markers attach to the noun phrase as a whole in a certain order Typically that order would be noun adjective numeral genitive phrase relative clause possessive marker plural marker case marker An example may be ๐’€ญ๐’ƒฒ๐’ƒฒ๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ๐’Š dig ir gal gal g u10 ne radig ir godgal gal g u ene ra great REDUP 1 POSS PL AN DAT dig ir gal gal g u ene ra god great REDUP 1 POSS PL AN DAT for my great gods The possessive plural and case markers are traditionally referred to as suffixes but have recently also been described as enclitics or postpositions Gender The two genders have been variously called animate and inanimate human and non human or personal person and impersonal non person Their assignment is semantically predictable the first gender includes humans and gods while the second one includes animals plants non living objects abstract concepts and groups of humans Since the second gender includes animals the use of the terms animate and inanimate is somewhat misleading and conventional but it is most common in the literature so it will be maintained in this article There are some minor deviations from the gender assignment rules for example The word for ๐’€ฉ alan statue may be treated as animate Words for slaves such as ๐’Šฉ๐’†ณ geme2 slave woman and ๐’Š• sag head used in its secondary sense of slave may be treated as inanimate In fable like contexts which occur frequently in Sumerian proverbs animals are usually treated as animate Number The plural marker proper is ๐’‚Š ๐’‰ˆ e ne It is used only with nouns of the animate gender and its use is optional It is often omitted when other parts of the clause indicate the plurality of the referent Thus it is not used if the noun is modified by a numeral ๐’‡ฝ๐’น๐’น๐’น lu2 es5 three men It has also been observed that until the Ur III period the marker generally isn t used in a noun phrase in the absolutive case unless this is necessary for disambiguation Instead the plurality of the absolutive participant is commonly expressed only by the form of the verb in the clause e g ๐’‡ฝ๐’€๐’€„๐’€„๐’Œ lu2 ba zaแธซ3 zaแธซ3 es the men ran away ๐’‡ฝ๐’ˆฌ๐’…‡๐’†ช๐’‰๐’Œ lu2 mu u3 dab5 be2 es I caught the men The plural marker is not used when referring to a group of people because a group of people is treated as inanimate e g ๐’€ณ engar farmer with no plural marker may refer to the group of farmers As the following example shows the marker is appended to the end of the phrase even after a relative clause ๐’‡ฝ๐’‚๐’€€๐’€๐’†ช๐’€๐’‰ˆ lu2 e2 a ba dab5 ba nelu mane a house inba dab a e ne MID catch NMLZ PL AN lu e a ba dab a e ne man house in MID catch NMLZ PL AN the men who were caught in the house Likewise the plural marker is usually albeit not always added only once when a whole series of coordinated nouns have plural reference ๐’€ณ๐’‰บ๐’‡ป๐’‹—๐’„ฉ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ engar sipad su ku6 e neengar farmersipad shepherdsukur ene fisherman PL AN engar sipad sukur ene farmer shepherd fisherman PL AN farmers shepherds and fishermen Another way in which a kind of plurality is expressed is by means of reduplication of the noun ๐’€ญ๐’€ญ dig ir dig ir gods ๐’Œˆ๐’Œˆ ib2 ib2 hips However this construction is usually considered to have a more specialized meaning variously interpreted as totality all the gods both of my hips or distribution separateness each of the gods taken separately An especially frequently occurring reduplicated word ๐’†ณ๐’†ณ kur kur foreign lands may have simply plural meaning and in very late usage the meaning of the reduplication in general might be simple plurality At least a few adjectives notably ๐’ƒฒ gal great and ๐’Œ‰ tur small are also reduplicated when the noun they modify has plural reference ๐’€€๐’ƒฒ๐’ƒฒ a gal gal the great waters In that case the noun itself is not reduplicated This is sometimes interpreted as an expression of simple plurality while a minority view is that the meaning of these forms is not purely plural but rather the same as that of noun reduplication Two other ways of expressing plurality are characteristic only of very late Sumerian usage and have made their way into Sumerograms used in writing Akkadian and other languages One is used with inanimate nouns and consists of the modification of the noun with the adjective ๐’„ญ๐’€€ แธซi a various lit mixed e g ๐’‡ป๐’„ญ๐’€€ udu แธซi a sheep The other is adding the 3rd person plural form of the enclitic copula ๐’ˆจ๐’Œ me es to a noun ๐’ˆ—๐’ˆจ๐’Œ lugal me es kings originally they who are kings Case Case markers The generally recognized case markers are case ending most common spelling approximate English equivalents and functionabsolutive O intransitive subject or transitive objectergative e primarily with animates ๐’‚Š e transitive subjectdirective e only with inanimates ๐’‚Š e in to contact with at upon for as for causeegenitive a k k ๐’€€ a of equative gin ๐’ถ gen7 as like dative r a only with animates ๐’Š ra to for upon causeeterminative e s e ๐’‚  se3 to towards for until in exchange for instead if as for because of comitative d a ๐’• da together with because of an emotion locative a only with inanimates ๐’€€ a in into on onto about by means of with a certain material ablative only with inanimates ta ๐’‹ซ ta from since by means of in addition to with distributive each The final vowels of most of the above markers are subject to loss if they are attached to vowel final words In addition there are the enclitic particles ๐’ˆพ๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ na an na meaning without and ๐’€€ ๐’…—๐’‰† a ka nam akanam in earlier Sumerian or ๐’€€ ๐’†ค๐’Œ a ke4 es2 akes because of in later Sumerian Note that these nominal cases enter interact with the so called dimensional prefixes of the verb that the noun modifies producing additional meanings While the dative and directive are in complementary distribution in the noun they can nevertheless be distinguished when the verbal prefixes are taken into account Likewise whereas the meanings in to and on to are expressed by the same nominal case they can be disambiguated by the verbal prefixes This is explained in more detail in the section on Dimensional prefixes Additional spatial or temporal meanings can be expressed by genitive phrases like at the head of above at the face of in front of at the outer side of because of etc ๐’‡๐’‡ป๐’Œ“๐’…— bar udu แธซad2 kabar outer sideudu sheepแธซad ak a white GEN LOC bar udu แธซad ak a outer side sheep white GEN LOC because of a white sheep The embedded structure of the noun phrase can be further illustrated with the following phrase ๐’‰บ๐’‡ป๐’‡ป๐’‹ ๐’…—๐’†ค๐’‰ˆ sipad udu siki ka ke4 nesipad shepherdudu sheepsiki a k ak ene wool GEN GEN PL AN sipad udu siki a k ak ene shepherd sheep wool GEN GEN PL AN shepherds of woolly sheep Here the first genitive morpheme a k subordinates ๐’‹  siki wool to ๐’‡ป udu sheep and the second subordinates ๐’‡ป๐’‹  udu siki a k sheep of wool or woolly sheep to ๐’‰บ๐’‡ป sipad shepherd Case usage The uses of the ergative and absolutive case are those typical of ergative languages The subject of an intransitive verb such as come is in the same case as the object of a transitive verb such as build namely the so called absolutive case In contrast the subject of a transitive verb has a different case which is termed ergative This can be illustrated with the following examples ๐’ˆ—๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’บ lugal i3 im g enlugal king ABSi m g en FIN VEN come lugal i m g en king ABS FIN VEN come The king came ๐’ˆ—๐’‚Š๐’‚๐’…”๐’†• lugal e e2 in du3lugal e king ERGe house ABSi n du FIN 3 AN A build lugal e e i n du king ERG house ABS FIN 3 AN A build The king built a house In contrast with the verbal morphology Sumerian nominal morphology consistently follows this ergative principle regardless of tense aspect person and mood Besides the general meanings of the case forms outlined above there are many lexically determined and more or less unpredictable uses of specific cases often governed by a certain verb in a certain sense The comitative is used to express to run away e g ๐’€„ zaแธซ3 or to take away e g ๐’‹ผ๐’€€ kar from somebody ๐’ช zu to know learn something from somebody ๐’ฒ sa2 to be equal to somebody but the same verb uses the directive in the phrasal verb si sa2 be put something in order see Phrasal verbs the meaning ago in the construction ๐’ˆฌ๐’• ๐’‹ซ mu da X ta X years ago lit since X with the years The directive is used to express the objects of ๐’ dab6 surround ๐’Š raแธซ2 hit ๐’‹› si fill ๐’‹ณ tag touch ๐’ˆญ daแธซ add something to something ๐’„„ gi4 in the sense bring back something to something ๐’‘ us2 be next to something follow something ๐’…— dug4 say something about concerning something b i dug say something about this often seems to have very vague reference approaching the meaning say something then The locative with a directive verbal prefix expressing on to is used to express ๐’†• ru2 hold on to something ๐’„ท๐’ˆฟ sa4 give as a name to somebody something ๐’บ tum2 be fit for something ๐’‰š sa10 to barter governs in the sense to to buy the terminative to introduce the seller from whom something is bought but in another construction it uses the locative for the thing something is bartered for ๐’‹พ ti to approach governs the dative For the government of phrasal verbs see the relevant section Pronouns The attested personal pronouns are independent possessive suffix enclitic1st person singular ๐’‚ท ๐’‚Š g e26 e ๐’ˆฌ g u102nd person singular ๐’ข ze2 Old Babylonian ๐’๐’‚Š za e ๐’ช zu3rd person singular animate ๐’€€๐’‰ˆ a ne or ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ e ne ๐’€€ ๐’‰Œ a ni3rd person inanimate ๐’‰ bi1st person plural ๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— me en de3 en ๐’ˆจ me ๐’ˆจ me2nd person plural ๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— me en ze2 en ๐’ช๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ zu ne ne3rd person plural animate ๐’€€ ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ a e ne ne ๐’€€ ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ a ne ne ๐’‰ bi The stem vowels of ๐’‚ท ๐’‚Š g e26 e and ๐’‚Š ze2 are assimilated to a following case suffix containing a and then have the forms ๐’‚ท g a and ๐’ za e g ๐’๐’Š za ra to you sg As far as demonstrative pronouns are concerned Sumerian most commonly uses the enclitic ๐’‰ bi to express the meaning this There are rare instances of other demonstrative enclitics such as ๐’‚Š e this ๐’Šบ se that and ๐’Š‘ re that The difference between the three has been explained in terms of increasing distance from the speaker or as a difference between proximity to the speaker proximity to the listener and distance from both akin to the Japanese or Latin three term demonstrative system The independent demonstrative pronouns are ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚Š ne e n this thing and ๐’„ฏ ur5 that thing ne n might also be used as another enclitic Now is ๐’‰Œ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚  i3 ne es2 or ๐’€€๐’•๐’€  a da al For then and there the declined noun phrases ๐’Œ“๐’€ ud ba at that time and ๐’† ๐’€ ki ba at that place are used so is ๐’„ฏ๐’ถ ur5 gen7 lit like that The interrogative pronouns are ๐’€€๐’€ a ba who and ๐’€€๐’ˆพ a na what also used as whoever and whatever when introducing dependent clauses The stem for where is ๐’ˆจ me used in the locative terminative and ablative to express where whither and whence respectively When is ๐’‡ท ๐’‚— en3 en but also the stem ๐’ˆจ ๐’‚Š ๐’ˆพ me e na is attested for when in the emphatic form me na am3 and in the terminative me na se3 until when how long How and why are expressed by ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’€ธ a na as lit what for and ๐’€€๐’ถ a gen7 how an equative case form perhaps like what The expected form ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’ถ a na gen7 is used in Old Babylonian An indefinite pronoun is ๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ na me any which is only attested in attributive function until the Old Babylonian period but may also stand alone in the sense anyone anything in late texts It can be added to nouns to produce further expressions with pronominal meaning such as ๐’‡ฝ๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ lu2 na me anyone ๐’ƒป๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ nig 2 na me anything ๐’† ๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ ki na me anywhere ๐’Œ“๐’ˆพ๐’ˆจ ud4 na me ever any time The nouns ๐’‡ฝ lu2 man and ๐’ƒป nig 2 thing are also used for someone anyone and something anything With negation all of these expressions naturally acquire the meanings nobody nothing nowhere and never The reflexive pronoun is ๐’…Ž ๐’‹ผ ni2 te self which generally occurs with possessive pronouns attached ๐’…Ž๐’ˆฌ ni2 g u10 my self etc The longer form appears in the third person animate ๐’…Ž๐’‹ผ๐’‰Œ ni2 te ni him herself ๐’…Ž๐’‹ผ๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ ni2 te ne ne themselves Adjectives It is controversial whether Sumerian has adjectives at all since nearly all stems with adjectival meaning are also attested as verb stems and may be conjugated as verbs ๐’ˆค maแธซ great gt ๐’Ž๐’€ ๐’ˆค nin al maแธซ the lady is great Jagersma believes that there is a distinction in that the few true adjectives cannot be negated and a few stems are different depending on the part of speech ๐’ƒฒ gal big but ๐’„–๐’ŒŒ gu ul be big Furthermore stems with adjective like meaning sometimes occur with the nominalizing suffix a but their behaviour varies in this respect Some stems appear to require the suffix always e g ๐’†—๐’‚ต kalag ga mighty ๐’Šท๐’‚ต sag9 ga beautiful ๐’๐’• gid2 da long these are verbs with adjectival meaning according to Jagersma Some never take the suffix e g ๐’ƒฒ gal big ๐’Œ‰ tur small and ๐’ˆค maแธซ great these are genuine adjectives according to Jagersma Finally some alternate ๐’ฃ zid right often occurs as ๐’ฃ๐’• zid da these are pairs of adjectives and verbs derived from them respectively according to Jagersma In the latter case attempts have been made to find a difference of meaning between the forms with and without a it has been suggested that the form with a expresses a kind of determination e g zid righteous true vs zid da right not left or restrictiveness e g ๐’‚๐’‰‹ e2 gibil a new house vs ๐’‚๐’‰‹๐’†ท e2 gibil la the new house as contrasted with the old one a the newer kind of house or the newest house as well as nominalization e g tur ra a the small one or a small thing Other scholars have remained sceptical about the posited contrasts A few adjectives like ๐’ƒฒ gal big and ๐’Œ‰ tur small appear to agree in number with a preceding noun in the plural by reduplication with some other adjectives the meaning seems to be each of them ADJ The colour term ๐’Œ“ ๐’Œ“ bar6 bar6 babbar white appears to have always been reduplicated and the same may be true of ๐’ˆช gig2 actually giggig black To express the comparative or superlative degree various constructions with the word ๐’‹›๐’€€ dirig exceed excess are used X locative dirig ga which exceeds all X dirig X genitive terminative exceeding X lit to the excess of X Adverbs and adverbial expressions Most commonly adverbial meanings are expressed by noun phrases in a certain case e g ๐’Œ“ ud ba then lit at that time There are two main ways to form an adverb of manner There is a dedicated adverbiative suffix ๐’‚  es2 which can be used to derive adverbs from both adjectives and nouns ๐’ฃ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚  zid de3 es2 rightly in the right way ๐’†ฐ๐’‚  numun es2 as seeds in the manner of seeds the enclitic ๐’‰ bi can be added to an adjectival stem ๐’‰‹๐’‰ gibil bi newly This too is interpreted by Jagersma as a deadjectival noun with a possessive clitic in the directive case gibil bi e lit at its newness For pronominal adverbs see the section on Pronouns Numerals Sumerian has a combination decimal and sexagesimal system for example 600 is ten sixties so that the Sumerian lexical numeral system is sexagesimal with 10 as a subbase The cardinal numerals and ways of forming composite numbers are as follows number name explanation notes cuneiform sign1 dis des as dili ๐’น ๐’€ธ 2 min ๐’ˆซ3 es5 ๐’Œ4 limmu ๐’‡น 5 ia2 i2 6 as ia2 five as one 7 imin umun5 umin ia2 five min two ๐’…“8 ussu 9 ilimmu ia2 i2 5 limmu 4 10 u ๐’Œ‹11 u dis ๐’Œ‹๐’น20 nis ๐’Œ‹๐’Œ‹30 usu3 ๐’Œ‹๐’Œ‹๐’Œ‹40 nimin less two tens 50 ninnu less ten 60 g es2 d 120 g es2 d min two g es2 d ๐’ˆซ240 g es2 d limmu four g es2 d 420 g es2 d imin seven g es d ๐’…“600 g es2 d u ten g es d 1000 li mu um borrowed from Akkadian ๐’‡ท๐’ˆฌ๐’Œ1200 g es2 d u min two g es2 d u ๐’ˆซ3600 sar2 totality ๐’Šน or ๐’„ญ36000 sar2 u ten totalities 216000 sar2 gal a big totality ๐’Šน๐’ƒฒ or ๐’„ญ๐’ƒฒ Ordinal numerals are formed with the suffix ๐’„ฐ๐’ˆ  kam ma in Old Sumerian and ๐’„ฐ ๐’ˆ  kam ma with the final vowel still surfacing in front of enclitics in subsequent periods However a cardinal numeral may also have ordinal meaning sometimes The syntax of numerals has some peculiarities Besides just being placed after a noun like other modifiers ๐’Œ‰ dumu es5 three children which may however also be written ๐’Œ‰ 3 dumu the numeral may be reinforced by the copula ๐’Œ‰ ๐’€€๐’€ญ dumu es5 am3 lit the children being three Finally there is a third construction in which the possessive pronoun ๐’‰ bi is added after the numeral which gives the whole phrase a definite meaning ๐’Œ‰ ๐’€€๐’‰ dumu es5 a bi the three children lit children the three of them The numerals ๐’ˆซ min two and es5 three are also supplied with the nominalizing marker a before the pronoun as the above example shows Fractions are formed with the phrase ๐’…† N ๐’…… igi N g al2 one Nth where ๐’…… g al2 may be omitted One half however is ๐’‹—๐’Š’๐’€€ su ru a later ๐’‹—๐’Š‘๐’€€ su ri a Another way of expressing fractions was originally limited to weight measures specifically fractions of the mina ๐’ˆ ๐’ˆพ ma na sussana one third literarlly two sixths sanabi two thirds the former two words are of Akkadian origins gig usila or ๐’‡ฒ๐’Œ‹๐’‚† la2 gig 4 u five sixths literally ten shekels split off from the mina or a mina minus ten shekels respectively ๐’‚† gig 4 one sixtieth lit a shekel since a shekel is one sixtieth of a mina Smaller fractions are formed by combining these e g one fifth is ๐’Œ‹๐’น๐’น๐’‚† 12 1 60 1 5 and two fifths are ๐’‡น๐’‚† 1 3 4 1 60 5 15 1 15 6 15 2 5 Verbal morphology General The Sumerian finite verb distinguishes a number of moods and agrees more or less consistently with the subject and the object in person number and gender The verb chain may also incorporate pronominal references to the verb s other modifiers which has also traditionally been described as agreement although in fact such a reference and the presence of an actual modifier in the clause need not co occur not only ๐’‚๐’‚ ๐’Œˆ๐’Œˆ๐’…†๐’บ๐’Œฆ e2 se3 ib2 si du un I m going to the house but also ๐’‚๐’‚ ๐’‰Œ๐’บ๐’Œฆ e2 se3 i3 du un I m going to the house and simply ๐’Œˆ๐’…†๐’บ๐’Œฆ ib2 si du un I m going to it are possible Hence the term cross reference instead of agreement has been proposed This article will predominantly use the term agreement The Sumerian verb also makes a binary distinction according to a category that some regard as tense past vs present future others as aspect perfective vs imperfective and that will be designated as TA tense aspect in the following The two members of the opposition entail different conjugation patterns and at least for many verbs different stems they are theory neutrally referred to with the Akkadian grammatical terms for the two respective forms แธซamแนญu quick and maru slow fat Finally opinions differ on whether the verb has a passive or a middle voice and how it is expressed It is often pointed out that a Sumerian verb does not seem to be strictly limited to only transitive or only intransitive usage e g the verb ๐’†ญ kur9 can mean both enter and insert bring in and the verb ๐’Œฃ de2 can mean both flow out and pour out This depends simply on whether an ergative participant causing the event is explicitly mentioned in the clause and in the agreement markers on the verb Some have even concluded that instead of speaking about intransitive and transitive verbs it may be better to speak only of intransitive and transitive constructions in Sumerian The verbal root is almost always a monosyllable and together with various affixes forms a so called verbal chain which is described as a sequence of about 15 slots though the precise models differ The finite verb has both prefixes and suffixes while the non finite verb may only have suffixes Broadly the prefixes have been divided in three groups that occur in the following order modal prefixes conjugation prefixes and pronominal and dimensional prefixes The suffixes are a future or imperfective marker ed pronominal suffixes and an a ending that nominalizes the whole verb chain The overall structure can be summarized as follows slot modal prefix conjugation prefixes pronominal prefix 1 dimensional prefix pronominal prefix 2 stem future imperfective pronominal suffix nominalizerfinite prefix coordinator prefix ventive prefix middle prefixcommon morphemes O แธซa u ga nu la i e a nga mu m ba O e r n n b a da ta si i ni O e r n n b e d en en O e enden enzen ene es a Examples using most of the above slots may be ๐’„ฉ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ แธซa mu un na ab sum2 mu neแธซa PREC mu VEN nn 3 SG AN a DAT b 3 INAN O sum give ene 3 PL AN A S IPFV แธซa mu nn a b sum ene PREC VEN 3 SG AN DAT 3 INAN O give 3 PL AN A S IPFV Let them give it to him here ๐’‰ก๐’Œ’๐’…†๐’‚Š๐’„„๐’„„๐’€€ nu ub si e gi4 gi4 anu NEG i FIN b INAN si TERM e 2 O gi4 gi4 return IPFV e 3 A IPFV a NMLZ nu i b si e gi4 gi4 e a NEG FIN INAN TERM 2 O return IPFV 3 A IPFV NMLZ one who does not bring you back to it More than one dimensional prefix may occur within the verb chain If so the prefixes are placed in a specific order which is shown the section Dimensional prefixes below The conjugation prefixes appear to be mutually exclusive to a great extent since the finite prefixes i e and a do not appear before mu ba and the sequence b i nor does the realization mu appear before ba or b i However it is commonly assumed that the spellings im im ma and im mi are equivalent to i mu i mu ba and i mu bi respectively According to Jagersma the reason for the restrictions is that the finite prefixes i e and a have been elided prehistorically in open syllables in front of prefixes of the shape CV consonant vowel The exception is the position in front of the locative prefix ni the second person dative ๐’Š r a and the second person directive ๐’Š‘ r i where the dominant dialect of the Old Babylonian period retains them Modal prefixes The modal prefixes express modality Some of them are generally combined with certain TAs in other cases the meaning of a modal prefix can depend on the TA O is the prefix of the simple indicative mood in other words the indicative is unmarked E g ๐’…”๐’…ฅ in gu7 O i n gu He ate it ๐’‰ก nu and ๐’†ท la ๐’‡ท li ๐’‰Œ li2 in Ur III spelling have negative meaning and can be translated as not The allomorphs la and li are used before the conjugation prefixes ๐’€ ba and ๐’‰ˆ bi2 respectively A following vowel i or e is contracted with the preceding u of nu with compensatory lengthening which is often graphically unexpressed compare ๐’‰Œ๐’บ i3 du he is walking but nu i du gt nuห du ๐’‰ก๐’…‡๐’บ nu u3 du he isn t walking If followed by a consonant on the other hand the vowel of nu appears to have been assimilated to the vowel of the following syllable because it occasionally appears written as ๐’ˆพ na in front of a syllable containing a E g ๐’‰ก๐’Œฆ๐’…ฅ nu u3 un gu7 nu i n gu He didn t eat it ๐’„ฉ แธซa ๐’ƒถ แธซe2 has either precative optative meaning let him do X may you do X or affirmative meaning he does this indeed partly depending on the type of verb If the verbal form denotes a transitive action precative meaning is expressed with the maru form and affirmative with the แธซamแนญu form In contrast if the verbal form is intransitive or stative the TA used is always แธซamแนญu Occasionally the precative optative form is also used in a conditional sense of if or when According to Jagersma the base form is ๐’„ฉ แธซa but in open syllables the prefix merges with a following conjugation prefix i3 into ๐’ƒถ แธซe2 Beginning in the later Old Akkadian period the spelling also shows assimilation of the vowel of the prefix to ๐’ƒถ แธซe2 in front of a syllable containing e in the Ur III period there is a tendency to generalize the variant ๐’ƒถ แธซe2 but in addition further assimilation to ๐’„ท แธซu in front of u is attested and graphic expressions of the latter become common in the Old Babylonian period Other scholars have contended that ๐’ƒถ แธซe2 was the only allomorph in the Archaic Sumerian period and many have viewed it as the main form of the morpheme E g ๐’ƒถ๐’…๐’…ฅ๐’‚Š แธซe2 eb gu7 e แธซa ib gu7 e let him eat it ๐’„ฉ๐’€ญ๐’…ฅ แธซa an gu7 He ate it indeed ๐’‚ต ga has cohortative meaning and can be translated as let me us do X or I will do X Occasional phonetic spellings show that its vowel is assimilated to following vowels producing the allomorphs written ๐’„„ gi4 and ๐’„˜ gu2 It is only used with แธซamแนญu stems but nevertheless uses personal prefixes to express objects which is otherwise characteristic of the maru conjugation ๐’‚ต๐’‰Œ๐’Œˆ๐’ƒป ga ni ib2 g ar let me put it there The plural number of the subject was not specially marked until the Old Babylonian period during which the 1st person plural suffix began to be added ๐’‚ต๐’‰Œ๐’Œˆ๐’ƒป๐’Š‘๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— ga ni ib2 g ar re en de3 en let us put it there E g ๐’‚ต๐’€Š๐’…ฅ ga ab gu7 Let me eat it ๐’…‡ u3 has prospective meaning after when if and is also used as a mild imperative Please do X It is only used with แธซamแนญu forms In open syllables the vowel of the prefix is assimilated to i3 and a in front of syllables containing these vowels The prefix acquires an additional l when located immediately before the stem resulting in the allomorph ๐’…‡๐’ŒŒ u3 ul E g ๐’Œฆ๐’…ฅ un gu7 If when he eats it ๐’ˆพ na has prohibitive negative optative meaning Do not do it He must not do it May he not do it or affirmative meaning he did it indeed depending on the TA of verb it almost always expresses negative meaning with the maru TA and affirmative meaning with the แธซamแนญu TA In its negative usage it can be said to function as the negation of the precative optative แธซa In affirmative usage it has been said to signal an emphatic assertion but some have also claimed that it expresses reported speech either traditional orally transmitted knowledge or someone else s words or that it introduces following events states to which it is logically connected as X happened na so then therefore Y happened According to Jagersma and others negative na and affirmative na are actually two different prefixes since negative na has the allomorph nan before a single consonant written ๐’ˆพ๐’€ญ na an or in front of the labial consonants b and m ๐’‰† nam whereas affirmative na does not E g ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’…ฅ๐’‚Š na ab gu7 e He must not eat it ๐’ˆพ๐’€ญ๐’…ฅ na an gu7 He ate it indeed ๐’€๐’Š ba ra has emphatic negative meaning He certainly does will not do it or vetitive meaning He should not do it although some consider the latter usage rare or non existent It can often function as the negation of cohortative ga and of affirmative แธซa It is combined with the maru TA if the verb denies an action always present or future and with the แธซamแนญu TA if it denies a state past present or future or an action always in the past The vetitive meaning requires it to be combined with the maru TA at least if the action is transitive E g ๐’€๐’Š๐’€Š๐’…ฅ๐’‚— ba ra ab gu7 en I certainly will not eat it ๐’€๐’Š๐’€ญ๐’…ฅ ba ra an gu7 He certainly didn t eat it ๐’‰ก๐’‘ nu us is a rare prefix that has been interpreted as having frustrative meaning i e as expressing an unrealizable wish If only he would do it It occurs both with แธซamแนญu and with maru E g ๐’‰ก๐’‘๐’Œˆ๐’…ฅ๐’‚Š nu us ib2 gu7 e If only he would eat it ๐’…† si earlier ๐’‚  se3 is a rare prefix with unclear and disputed meaning which has been variously described as affirmative he does it indeed contrapunctive correspondingly on his part as reconfirming something that already ha s been stated or ha s occurred or as so therefore It occurs both with แธซamแนญu and with maru In Southern Old Sumerian the vowel alternated between e before open vowels and i before close ones in accordance with the vowel harmony rule of that dialect later it displays assimilation of the vowel in an open syllable depending on the vowel of the following syllable to sa ๐’Šญ sa ๐’บ sa4 and first attested in Old Babylonian to ๐’‹— su E g ๐’…†๐’…”๐’…ฅ si in gu7 So correspondingly accordingly he ate it Although the modal prefixes are traditionally grouped together in one slot in the verbal chain their behaviour suggests a certain difference in status only nu and แธซa exhibit morphophonemic evidence of co occurring with a following finite conjugation prefix while the others do not and hence seem to be mutually exclusive with it For this reason Jagersma separates the first two as proclitics and groups the others together with the finite prefix as non proclitic preformatives Conjugation prefixes The meaning structure identity and even the number of the various conjugation prefixes have always been a subject of disagreements The term conjugation prefix simply alludes to the fact that a Sumerian finite verb in the indicative mood must nearly always contain one of them Which of these prefixes is used seems to have more often than not no effect on its translation into European languages Proposed explanations of the choice of conjugation prefix usually revolve around the subtleties of spatial grammar information structure focus verb valency and most recently voice The following description primarily follows the analysis of Jagersma 2010 largely seconded by Zolyomi 2017 and Sallaberger 2023 in its specifics nonetheless most of the interpretations in it are held widely if not universally ๐’‰Œ i3 Southern Old Sumerian variant ๐’‚Š e in front of open vowels sometimes described as a finite prefix appears to have a neutral finite meaning As mentioned above it generally does not occur in front of a prefix or prefix sequence of the shape CV except in Old Babylonian Sumerian in front of the locative prefix ๐’‰Œ ni the second person dative ๐’Š r a and the second person directive ๐’Š‘ r i E g ๐’…”๐’บ in re6 O i n re He brought it ๐’€€ a with the variant ๐’€  al used in front of the stem the other finite prefix is rare in most Sumerian texts outside of the imperative form but when it occurs it usually has stative meaning It is common in the Northern Old Sumerian dialect where it can also have a passive meaning According to Jagersma it was used in the South as well during the Old Sumerian period but only in subordinate clauses where it regularly characterized not only stative verbs in แธซamแนญu but also verbs in maru in the Neo Sumerian period only the pre stem form al was still used and it no longer occurred with maru forms Like i3 the prefix a does not occur in front of a CV sequence except in Old Babylonian Sumerian in front of the locative prefix ๐’‰Œ ni the second person dative ๐’Š r a and the second person directive ๐’Š‘ r i E g ๐’€ ๐’บ al re6 It is was brought ๐’ˆฌ mu is most commonly considered to be a ventive prefix expressing movement towards the speaker or proximity to the speaker in particular it is an obligatory part of the 1st person dative form ๐’ˆ  ma mu a However many of its occurrences appear to express more subtle and abstract nuances or general senses which different scholars have sought to pinpoint They have often been derived from abstract nearness to the speaker or involvement of the speaker It has been suggested variously that mu may be adding nuances of emotional closeness or alignment of the speaker with the agent or other participants of the event topicality foregrounding of the event as something essential to the message with a focus on a person movement or action directed towards an entity with higher social status prototypical transitivity with its close association with control agency and animacy as well as focus or emphasis on the role of the agent telicity as such or that it is attracted by personal dative prefixes in general as is the Akkadian ventive E g ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’บ mu un re6 He brought it here ๐’…Ž im and ๐’€€๐’€ญam3 are widely seen as being formally related to mu and as also having ventive meaning according to Jagersma they consist of an allomorph of mu namely m and the preceding prefixes ๐’‰Œ i3 and ๐’€€ a In his analysis these combinations occur in front of a CV sequence where the vowel u of mu is lost whereas the historically preceding finite prefix is preserved i mu si g en gt ๐’…Ž๐’…†๐’บ im si g en he came for it In Zolyomi s slightly different analysis which is supported by Sallaberger there may also be a b in the underlying form which also elicits the allomorph m i mu b si g en gt i m b si g en gt i m si g en The vowel of the finite prefix undergoes compensatory lengthening immediately before the stem i mu g en gt ๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’บ i3 im g en he came E g ๐’…Ž๐’บ๐’ˆฌ im tum3 mu i mu b tum e He will bring it here The vowel of mu is not elided in front of the locative prefix ๐’‰Œ ni the second person dative ๐’Š r a and the second person directive ๐’Š‘ r i It may however be assimilated to the vowel of the following syllable This produces two allomorphs ๐’ˆช mi in the sequences ๐’ˆช๐’‰Œ mi ni and ๐’ˆช๐’Š‘ mi ri E g ๐’ˆช๐’‰Œ๐’…”๐’บ mi ni in re6 He brought it in here ๐’ˆ  ma in the sequence ๐’ˆ ๐’Š ma ra E g ๐’ˆ ๐’Š๐’€ญ๐’บ ma ra an re6 He brought it here to you ๐’‰ˆ bi2 Old Sumerian Lagas spelling ๐’‰ bi or be2 in front of open vowels Old Sumerian Ur spelling ๐’‰ฟ be6 is usually seen as a sequence of the personal prefix b and the directive prefix i or e E g ๐’‰ˆ๐’…”๐’บ bi2 in re6 He made it the ox the group of workers bring it ๐’€ ba can be analysed as a sequence of the personal prefix b and the dative prefix a However it has been argued that in spite of this origin ba now occupies a slot of its own before the first pronominal prefix and the dimensional prefixes In accordance with its assumed origin as b a it has often been observed that ba appears to have the meaning of a 3rd person inanimate dative for it to it However this explains only some of its occurrences A number of other apparent meanings and uses of ba have been noted and most of these are subsumed by Jagersma under the overarching function of a middle voice marker They include a reflexive indirect object to do something for oneself separation and movement away from the centre of attention towards a distant goal especially with motion verbs a change of state the passive voice i e occurrence with normally transitive verbs when their agent is not mentioned the latter not in Northern Sumerian according to Jagersma Some researchers also view it more generally as expressing focus or emphasis on the patient goal and relatively low transitivity and thereby as the polar opposite of mu as they understand it E g ๐’€๐’€ญ๐’บ ba an re6 He brought it to it He took it for himself He took it away ๐’€๐’บ ba re6 It was brought ๐’…Ž๐’ˆช im mi Southern Old Sumerian ๐’‰Œ๐’ˆช i3 mi or in front of open vowels ๐’‚Š๐’ˆจ e me and ๐’…Ž๐’ˆ  im ma Southern Old Sumerian ๐’‚Š๐’ˆ  e ma are generally seen as closely related to one another and im mi is widely considered to contain the directive prefix i e One common analysis is that im mi and im ma represent sequences of im and bi2 and ba respectively where the consonant b has undergone assimilation to the preceding m Accordingly their meaning is considered to be simply a combination of the ventive meaning of im and the meanings of bi2 and ba on which see above This is the analysis espoused by Jagersma and Zolyomi and it is reflected in the schemes and examples in this article Alternatively some authors regard im ma as a prefix in its own right and it has sometimes been ascribed a middle voice meaning distinct from the more passive nuance of ba E g ๐’…Ž๐’ˆช๐’…”๐’บ im mi in re6 He made it the ox the group of workers bring it here ๐’…Ž๐’ˆ ๐’บ im ma re6 It was brought here ๐’€€๐’€ญ๐’ˆช am3 mi and ๐’€€๐’€ญ๐’ˆ  am3 ma are typically analysed along the same lines as im mi and im ma but with a preceding am from a instead of im from i on the meaning of these see above The rare prefix nga means also equally often written without the initial n especially in earlier periods It is of crucial importance for the ordering of the conjugation prefixes because it is usually placed between the conjugation prefix i and the pronominal prefix e g ๐’…”๐’‚ต๐’€ญ๐’ช in ga an zu he too knows it but it precedes the conjugation prefix mu ๐’ˆพ๐’‚ต๐’ˆฌ๐’ช na ga mu zu he also understood it This suggests that these two conjugation prefixes must belong to different slots Although a conjugation prefix is almost always present Sumerian until the Old Babylonian period allows a finite verb to begin directly with the locative prefix ni the second person singular dative r a or the second person directive r i see below because the prefixes i3 e and a are apparently elided in front of them Pronominal and dimensional prefixes The dimensional prefixes of the verb chain basically correspond to and often repeat the case markers of the noun phrase Like the case markers of the noun phrase the first dimensional prefix is normally attached to a preceding head a pronominal prefix which expresses the person gender and number of its referent The first dimensional prefix may be followed by up to two other dimensional prefixes but unlike the first one these prefixes never have an explicit head and cannot refer to animate nouns The other slot where a pronominal prefix can occur is immediately before the stem where it can have a different allomorph and expresses the person gender and absolutive or the ergative participant the transitive subject the intransitive subject or the direct object depending on the TA and other factors as explained below There is some variation in the extent to which the verb of a clause that contains a noun in a given case also contains the corresponding pronominal and dimensional prefixes in the verb The ergative participant is always expressed in the verb as is generally the absolutive one with some vacillation for the third person singular inanimate in transitive forms as explained below the dative comitative the locative and directive participant used in a local meaning also tend to be expressed relatively consistently with the ablative and terminative on the other hand there is considerable variability There are some cases specified below where the meanings of the cases in the noun phrase and in the verb diverge so a noun case enclitic may not be reflected in the verb or conversely a verb may have a prefix that has no specific reference in the clause or in reality Pronominal prefixes The forms of the pronominal prefixes are the following prefix Notes1st person singular ส” gt V The vowel V is identical to that of the preceding prefix ๐’ˆฌ๐’…‡ mu u3 ๐’€๐’€€ ba a ๐’‰ˆ๐’‰Œ bi2 i3 etc Possibly originally a glottal stop ส” which was later elided with compensatory lengthening of the preceding vowel 2nd person singular ๐’‚Š e r r before a vowel before the dative and the directive prefixes resulting in ๐’Š ra and ๐’Š‘ ri e before a consonant e is assimilated to the preceding vowel lengthening it e g ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š mu e gt ๐’ˆฌ๐’…‡ mu u3 etc in the dialects attested before the Old Babylonian period In the Old Babylonian dialect e is preserved e g ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š mu e and the preceding vowel may assimilate to the e instead e g ๐’ˆจ me 3rd person singular animate n n According to Jagersma and a number of other scholars the allomorph that appears in front of the vowel initial dimensional prefixes i e in front of dative a and directive i is a geminate nn The traditional view assumes simply n The geminate analysis is assumed in the examples and glosses in this article 3rd person inanimate b Seems to be absent in some cases see the main text Note that the inanimate agreement marker has no number distinction 1st person plural ๐’ˆจ me When the prefix is placed immediately before the stem and expresses a transitive subject the singular is used instead See the table in Pronominal agreement with subjects and direct objects As in the singular the 3rd person animate form begins in a geminate nn according to Jagersma and others 2nd person plural ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ e ne re 3rd person plural animate only ๐’‰ˆ nne Confusingly the subject and object prefixes n b e V are not commonly spelled out in early texts as both coda consonants and vowel length are often ignored in them The full spellings do become more usual during the Third Dynasty of Ur in the Neo Sumerian period and especially during the Old Babylonian period Thus in earlier texts one finds ๐’ˆฌ๐’€ mu ak and ๐’‰Œ๐’€ i3 ak ๐’‚Š๐’€ e ak in Southern Sumerian instead of ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’€ mu un ak and ๐’…”๐’€ in ak for mu n ak and i n ak he she made and also ๐’ˆฌ๐’€ mu ak instead of Neo Sumerian ๐’ˆฌ ๐’…‡ ๐’€ mu u3 ak or Old Babylonian ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š๐’€ mu e ak you made Vowel length never came to be expressed systematically so the 1st person prefix was often graphically during the entire existence of Sumerian Dimensional prefixes The generally recognized dimensional prefixes are shown in the table below if several occur within the same verb complex they are placed in the order they are listed in dative comitative ablative terminative directive locative a ๐’• da ๐’‹พ di3 ๐’‹ซ ta ๐’Š ra ๐’…† si early ๐’‚  se3 i e ๐’‚Š ๐’‰Œ ni The ablative does not co occur with the terminative and the directive does not co occur with the locative so these pairs may be argued to share the same slot Accordingly the template can be said to include the following dimensional slots dative comitative ablative terminative directive locative A major exception from the general system of personal and dimensional prefixes is the very frequent prefix ๐’‰Œ ni in there which corresponds to a noun phrase in the locative but doesn t seem to be preceded by any pronominal prefix and has demonstrative meaning by itself This prefix is not to be confused with the homographic sequence ๐’‰Œ ni which corresponds to an animate noun phrase in the directive In the latter case ni is analysed as a combination of pronominal nn and directive i roughly at him her on him her etc whereas in the former ni is unanalysable An example of a verb chain where several dimensional slots are occupied can be ๐’…”๐’ˆพ๐’‹ซ๐’‰Œ๐’…”๐’Œ“๐’บ in na ta ni in ed2i FIN nn 3 SG AN a DAT ta ABL ni LOC n 3 AN A ed go out i nn a ta ni n ed FIN 3 SG AN DAT ABL LOC 3 AN A go out He made it the dike go out of it a canal for him into it a locality The comitative prefix da can in addition express the meaning to be able to In that case there is a preceding pronominal prefix agreeing with the subject of the action e g nu mu e da n dab en you cannot catch him lit you won t catch him with yourself The directive has the meaning on to when the verb is combined with a noun in the locative case e g bansur a ninda b i b g a g a en I will put bread on the table Differences and combinations between dimensional prefixes and noun case markers While the meanings of the prefixes are generally the same as those of the corresponding nominal case markers there are some differences The prefixes unlike noun phrases in the corresponding cases normally refer only to participants with a strong relationship to the action or state expressed by the verb e g a temporal meaning like since X may be expressed by means of a noun phrase with a ta case marker but that normally wouldn t be cross referenced with a ta prefix on the verb The use of dimensional prefixes is sometimes more closely connected to special meanings of specific verbs and to lexical idiosyncrasies For instance the verb ๐’‡ฏ๐’บ ed3 has the meaning go up with the directive prefix but go down with the ablative one the verb ๐’‰š sa10 means sell with the ablative prefix and buy with the terminative the verb ๐’Œ“๐’บ ed2 leave go out always has the ablative prefix and the phrasal verb ๐’…— ๐’„„ inim gi4 answer lit return a word always includes the locative In general verbs having a place related meaning such as ๐’„ bala cross ๐’…… g al2 be somewhere ๐’ƒป g ar put ๐’บ gub stand ๐’†ญ kur9 enter ๐’‹› sig9 put and ๐’†ช tus sit generally occur with a dimensional prefix specifying a location Thus a verb may albeit rarely contain a dimensional prefix that simply modifies its meaning and has no reference In such cases it has no preceding pronominal prefix even if it is the first dimensional prefix e g ๐’€๐’Š๐’€ญ๐’‰š ba ra an sa10 ba ta n sa he sold it The directive may be replaced by the dative when its slot is occupied by the locative or when it would have had animate reference but there is a preceding prefix which makes any further prefixes with animate reference illicit At the systemic level there are some asymmetries between the nominal case markers and the verbal dimensional prefixes they partly make different distinctions and the nominal case marking is influenced by animacy Because of these mismatches different meanings are expressed by combinations of matching or non matching noun cases and verb prefixes The combinations may be summarized as follows meaning nominal case marker inanimate nominal case marker animate verbal prefix example inanimate example animate inessive in to a locative ni locative e a i ni n g ar he placed it in the house superessive on to a locative ra dative i e directive e a b i n g ar he placed it on the house lu ra i nn i n g ar he placed it on the man adessive at causee e directive ra dative i e directive e e b i n tag he touched the house lu ra i nn i n tag he touched the man dative e directive ra dative a dative e e b a n sum he gave it to the house lu ra i nn a n sum he gave it to the man In some cases there are also mismatches between nominal and verbal markers when exact correspondences would have been possible these may serve to express additional shades of meaning A dative noun case marker and terminative dimensional prefix may co occur in the Ur III period In general from that time on the choice of noun cases begins to be influenced by the government of corresponding Akkadian verbs while the verbs themselves retain their older prefixes According to Foxvog ni can resume non locative cases such as the terminative and the dative A peculiar pattern of agreement occurs in what has been referred to as an external possession construction in which a modifier of the verb refers to a certain object almost always a body part but it is emphasised that the action affects the possessor of that object cf English he hit me on the head In that case the verb may agree with the possessor with the directive prefix while not agreeing with the object itself thus he put barley in your hand may be expressed by su z u a se i r i n g ar lit he put barley at you in your hand Alternatively it may agree with both the possessor and the object the possessor is then referred to by the dative prefix su z u a se i r a ni n g ar lit he put barley to you in there in your hand Use of the ventive as a 1st person marker When the dimensional prefix is dative a the personal prefix of the 1st person appears to be absent but the 1st person reference is expressed by the choice of the ventive conjugation prefix mu The sequence that expresses the 1st person dative is then mu a ๐’ˆ  ma When the intended meaning is that of the directive i e on me in contact with me etc it seems that the ventive conjugation prefix ๐’ˆฌ mu alone serves to express it Syncope of i in ni and bi Two special phenomena occur if there is no absolutive ergative pronominal prefix in the pre stem position 1 The sequences ๐’‰Œ ni locative ni and personal directive nn i and ๐’‰ˆ bi personal directive b i acquire the forms n and b coinciding with the absolutive ergative pronominal prefixes before the stem if there isn t already an absolutive ergative pronominal prefix in pre stem position This is typically the case when the verb is used intransitively For example the normal appearance of ni is seen in mu ni n kur he brought it in lit caused it to go in gt muninkur written ๐’ˆฌ๐’‰Œ๐’†ญ mu ni kur9 in early texts later ๐’ˆฌ๐’‰Œ๐’…”๐’†ญ mu ni in kur9 In contrast in an intransitive form we find a syncopated realization mu ni kur he went in gt muหnkur written ๐’ˆฌ๐’†ญ mu kur9 in early texts later ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’†ญ mu un kur9 The preceding vowel undergoes compensatory lengthening which is sometimes indicated by its doubling in the spelling i ni kur gt i3 in kur9 ๐’‰Œ๐’…”๐’†ญ he went in Likewise the normal realisation of bi is seen in i b i n si gt bi2 in si ๐’‰ˆ๐’…”๐’‹› he loaded it on it This is to be contrasted with the syncopated version in an intransitive form i b i si gt i3 ib2 si ๐’‰Œ๐’Œˆ๐’‹› it was loaded on it The same phonological pattern is claimed to account for the alternation between the forms of the ventive prefix The standard appearance is seen in i mu n ak gt mu un ak ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’€ he did it here In an intransitive form however we find i mu g en gt i3 im g en ๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’บ he came here Expression of the directive by a pre stem personal prefix A superficially very similar but distinct phenomenon is that if there isn t already an absolutive ergative pronominal prefix in pre stem position the personal prefix of the directive participant does not receive the dimensional prefix i e at all and is moved to the pre stem position For example the normal position of the directive participant is seen in b i n ak bi2 in ak ๐’‰ˆ๐’…”๐’€ he applied it to it said of oil In contrast in an intransitive form we find ba b ak ba ab ak ๐’€๐’€Š๐’€ it was applied to it In the same way the normal position is seen in b i n us bi2 in us2 ๐’‰ˆ๐’…”๐’‘ he adjoined it to it This can be contrasted with an intransitive form i b us ib2 us2 ๐’Œˆ๐’‘ it was adjoined to it Absence of b In some cases the 3rd person inanimate prefix b appears to be unexpectedly absent b as the head of a dimensional prefix isn t used after the conjugation prefix ba thus ๐’€๐’€Š๐’…†๐’Œˆ๐’„„๐’„„ ba ab si ib2 gi4 gi4 he will return it to it for himself is impossible This restriction does not however apply for b as a subject object prefix immediately before the stem thus ๐’€๐’€Š๐’„„๐’„„ ba ab gi4 gi4 he will return it for himself is possible In some schemes this is formalized as the placement of the initial pronominal prefix b in the same slot as ba and not in the following slot where all the other initial pronominal prefixes such as n are located b also regularly fails to appear after the ventive conjugation prefix mu instead of expected ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œ’๐’…†๐’บ mu ub si g en the meaning he came for it is expressed by ๐’…Ž๐’…†๐’บ im si g en Similarly instead of ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œ’๐’‚ท๐’‚ท mu ub g a2 g a2 for he is placing it here we find ๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’‚ท๐’‚ท i3 im g a2 g a2 While some believe that b in this case is truly omitted others assume that such forms in fact contain an assimilated sequence mb gt mm gt m just like the forms im mi and im ma so that the above realisations actually stand for i m b si g en and i m b g a g a For another case of absence of b see the footnote on b as a marker of the transitive object in the table in the section on Pronominal agreement in conjugation Pronominal suffixes The pronominal suffixes are as follows maru แธซamแนญu1st person singular ๐’‚— en2nd person singular ๐’‚— en3rd person singular ๐’‚Š e O 1st person plural ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— en de3 en2nd person plural ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— en ze2 en3rd person plural animate only ๐’‚Š ๐’‰ˆ e ne ๐’‚  ๐’Œ es2 es The initial vowel in all of the above suffixes can be assimilated to the vowel of the verb root more specifically it can become u or i if the vowel of the verb root is u or i respectively It can also undergo contraction with an immediately preceding vowel Pre Ur III texts also spell the first and second person suffix en as e making it coincide with the third person in the maru form Pronominal agreement with subjects and direct objects Sumerian verbal agreement follows a nominative accusative pattern in the 1st and 2nd persons of the maru tense aspect but an ergative absolutive pattern in most other forms of the indicative mood Because of this presence of both patterns Sumerian is considered a language with split ergativity The general principle is that in the แธซamแนญu TA the transitive subject is expressed by the prefix and the direct object by the suffix and in the maru TA it is the other way round For example i b dab en can be a แธซamแนญu form meaning it caught me where b expresses the subject it and en expresses the object I However it can also be a maru form meaning I will catch it where en expresses the subject I and b expresses the object it As for the intransitive subject it is expressed in both TAs by the suffixes For example i kas en is I ran and i kas ed en can be I will run This means that the intransitive subject is treated like the object in แธซamแนญu which makes the แธซamแนญu pattern ergative and like the subject in maru which makes the maru pattern nominative accusative There are two exceptions from the above generalization 1 A transitive subject of the third person in maru uses unique suffixes that are not the same as those of the intransitive subject and the แธซamแนญu direct object For example while they ran can be i kas es just as it caught them can be i b dab es the corresponding form for they will catch it would be i b dab ene This pattern can be described as a case of tripartite alignment 2 A plural transitive subject in the แธซamแนญu TA is expressed not only by the prefix but also by the suffix e g i n dab es can mean they caught it Specifically the prefix expresses only the person while the suffix expresses both the person and the number of the subject Note that the prefixes of the plural transitive subject are identical to those of the singular V e n as opposed to the special plural forms me e ne ne found in non pre stem position The use of the personal affixes for subjects and direct objects can be summarized as follows แธซamแนญu maruDirect object Intransitive subject Transitive subject Direct object Intransitive subject Transitive subject1st sing en en V V en en 2nd sing en en e e en en 3rd sing animate O O n n O e 3rd inanimate O O b b O e 1st pl enden enden V enden me enden enden 2nd pl enzen enzen e enzen e ne enzen enzen 3rd pl animate only es es n es ne b es ene Examples for TA and pronominal agreement แธซamแนญu is rendered with past tense maru with present i gub en ๐’‰Œ๐’บ๐’‰๐’‚— I stood or I stand i n gub en ๐’…”๐’บ๐’‰๐’‚— he placed me or I place him i sug enden ๐’‰Œ๐’ป๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— we stood stand i n dim enden ๐’…”๐’ถ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— he created us or we create him mu V dim enden ๐’ˆฌ๐’ถ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— we created someone or something i b gub e ๐’Œˆ๐’บ๐’‰ he places it i b dim ene ๐’Œˆ๐’ถ๐’ˆจ๐’‰ˆ they create it i n dim es ๐’…”๐’ถ๐’ˆจ๐’Œ they created someone or something or he created them i sug es ๐’‰Œ๐’ป๐’„€๐’Œ they stood or they stand Stem The verbal stem itself can also express grammatical distinctions within the categories number and tense aspect In a number of verbs this involves suppletion or morphonological alternations that are not fully predictable 1 With respect to number plurality can be expressed by complete reduplication of the แธซamแนญu stem e g ๐’†ญ๐’†ญ kur9 kur9 enter pl or by a suppletive stem e g ๐’บ gub stand sing ๐’ป sug2 stand pl The traditional view is that both of these morphological means express plurality of the absolutive participant in Sumerian However it has often been pointed out that complete reduplication of the verb in Sumerian can also express plurality of the action itself intensity or iterativity and that it is not obligatory in the presence of plural participants but rather seems to expressly emphasize the plurality According to some researchers the predominant meaning of the suppletive plural stem is indeed plurality of the most affected participants whereas the predominant meaning of complete reduplication is plurality of events because they occur at multiple times or locations However even with suppletive plural stems the singular may occur with a plural participant presumably because the event is perceived as a single one 2 With respect to tense aspect marking verbs are divided in four types แธซamแนญu is always the unmarked TA The stems of the 1st type regular verbs are analysed in two ways some scholars believe that they do not express TA at all while others claim that they express maru TA by adding a suffix e as in ๐’ถ๐’‚Š dim2 e vs ๐’ถ dim2 make This e would however nowhere be distinguishable from the first vowel of the pronominal suffixes except for intransitive maru 3rd person singular in that last form the first analysis attributes the e to the presence of the e d suffix described below The glosses in this article assume the first analysis The 2nd type expresses maru by partial reduplication of the stem e g ๐’†ญ kur9 vs ๐’†ญ๐’†ญ ku4 ku4 enter Usually as in this example this maru reduplication follows the pattern C1V1 C1V1 C1 1st consonant of the root V 1st vowel of the root In a few cases the template is instead C1V1C1C2V1 The 3rd type expresses maru by adding a consonant e g te vs teg 3 approach both written ๐’‹ผ A number of scholars do not recognise the existence of such a class or consider it dubious The 4th type uses a suppletive stem e g ๐’…— dug4 vs ๐’‚Š e do say Thus as many as four different suppletive stems can exist as in the admittedly extreme case of the verb to go ๐’บ g en to go แธซamแนญu sing ๐’บ du maru sing ๐’‚Š ๐’ป e re7 แธซamแนญu plur ๐’ป sub2 maru plur The following tables show some of the most frequent stem alternations Verbs with suppletive plurals singular plural meaning๐’บ gub ๐’ป sug2 stand ๐’‹พ til2 ๐’‡ป lug for animals ๐’…Š se12 sig7 live ๐’บ tum2 ๐’บ๐’บ laแธซ5 lead carry countable objects ๐’†ญ kur9 ๐’” sun5 enter the use of the suppletive plural stem seems to be optional Verbs with suppletive maru forms singular plural meaningแธซamแนญu maru แธซamแนญu maru๐’…— dug4 ๐’‚Š e maru participle ๐’ฒ di d do say ๐’บ g en ๐’บ du ๐’‚Š ๐’ป e re7 ๐’ป sub2 go ๐’บ re6 ๐’‰ tum3 carry bring carry an uncountable mass ๐’†ช tus ๐’†ช dur2 ๐’‚‰ durun sit live somewhere ๐’ us4 ๐’ ug7 ๐’‚ฆ ug5 die Frequent verbs with reduplicating maru forms แธซamแนญu maru meaning๐’‰‹ bil2 ๐’‰‹๐’‰‹ BIL2 BIL2 burn๐’Š‘ degโ‚“ ๐’Š‘๐’Š‘ de5 de5 gather๐’‚„ dun DUN DUN string up together๐’” dun5 DUN5 DUN5 swing๐’…๐’‚ท ๐’… gag ga6 ga6 carry๐’„„ gi4 gi4 gi4 turn๐’ฝ gir5 GIR5 GIR5 slip dive๐’†ฅ gur10 GUR10 GUR10 reap๐’ƒป g ar ๐’‚ท๐’‚ท g a2 g a2 put๐’„ฉ๐’†ท แธซa la ๐’„ฌ๐’„ฉ แธซal แธซa divide๐’…†๐’Œจ แธซulu ๐’…†๐’Œจ๐’„ท แธซulu แธซu แธซulแธซu be bad destroy๐’†ฅ kig 2 KIG 2 KIG 2 seek๐’†ญ kur9 ku4 ku4 enter๐’Šฌ mu2 mu2 mu2 grow๐’Œ† mur10 mu4 mu4 dress๐’…˜ nag na8 na8 drink๐’†ธ๐’†ธ nig in ๐’†ธ๐’†ธ ni10 ni10 ๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ ne ne go around๐’Š raแธซ2 ra ra hit๐’‰š sa10 sa10 sa10 barter๐’‹› si si si fill๐’‹ข sug6 su2 su2 repay๐’‚ž ses2 se8 se8 anoint cry๐’Œ‹ sus ๐’‹™ sus2 ๐’Œ‹๐’Œ‹ su4 su4 ๐’‹™๐’‹™ su2 su2 cover๐’‹บ taka4 da13 da13 leave behind๐’‹ผ๐’‚— te en te en te cool off๐’‹—๐’‰€ tu5 tu5 tu5 bathe in๐’Œ‡ tuku du12 du12 have๐’‹ณ tuku5 TUKU5 TUKU5 weave๐’…‡ ๐’†ช u3 ku4 u3 ku4 ku4 sleep๐’ฃ zig3 zi zi rise๐’ช zu zu zu learn informThe modal or imperfective suffix ed Before the pronominal suffixes a suffix ed or d can be inserted the d is only realized if other vowels follow in which case the e in turn may be elided e g ๐’‰Œ๐’€„ ๐’‚Š ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— i3 zaแธซ3 e de3 en i zaแธซ ed en I will must escape ๐’‰Œ๐’€„๐’‚Š i3 zaแธซ3 e i zaแธซ ed he will must escape This suffix is considered to account for occurrences of e in the third person singular maru of intransitive forms by those who do not accept the theory that e itself is a maru stem formant The function of the suffix is somewhat controversial Some view it as having a primarily modal meaning of must or can or future meaning Others believe that it primarily signals simply the imperfective status of a verb form i e a maru form although its presence is obligatory only in intransitive maru forms and in non finite forms In intransitive forms it thus helps to distinguish maru from แธซamแนญu for instance in the above example ๐’‰Œ๐’€„๐’‚— i3 zaแธซ3 en alone without ed could have been interpreted as a แธซamแนญu form I escaped In contrast in the analysis of scholars who do not believe that ed is obligatory in maru many intransitive forms like i3 zaแธซ3 en can be both แธซamแนญu and maru The vowel e of this suffix undergoes the same allophonic changes as the initial e of the person suffixes It is regularly assimilated to u in front of stems containing the vowel u and a following labial consonant r or l e g ๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ๐’• sum2 mu d lt sum ed It is also assimilated and contracted with immediately preceding vowels e g ๐’„„ gi4 gi4 gi gi i d lt gi gi ed which will should return The verb ๐’บ du go never takes the suffix Use of the tense aspect forms Jagersma systematizes the use of the tense aspect forms in the following patterns แธซamแนญu is used to express completed perfective actions in the past but also states past or present and timeless truths It is also used in conditional clauses with the conjunction ๐’‹—๐’ƒป๐’Œ‰๐’‡ฒ๐’‰ tukumbi if maru is used to express actions in the present and future but also non completed imperfective actions in the past like the English past progressive tense and rarely actions in the past that are still relevant or operative like the English present perfect tense It is also used in conditional clauses with the conjunction ๐’Œ“๐’• ud da if Verba dicendi introducing direct speech are also placed in maru In addition different moods often require either a แธซamแนญu or a maru stem and either a แธซamแนญu or a maru agreement pattern depending on various conditions as specified in the relevant sections above and below In more general terms modern scholars usually state that the difference between the two forms is primarily one of aspect แธซamแนญu expresses perfective aspect i e a completed action or sometimes possibly punctual aspect whereas maru expresses imperfective aspect i e a non completed action or sometimes possibly durative aspect In contrast the time at which the action takes place or at which it is completed or non completed is not specified and may be either past present or future This contrasts with the earlier view prevalent in the first half of the 20th century according to which the difference was one of tense แธซamแนญu was thought to express the past preterite tense and maru was considered to express present future tense while the use of maru with past tense reference was viewed as a stylistic device cf the so called historical present use in other languages Indeed it has been pointed out that a translation of แธซamแนญu with past tense and maru with present or future tense does work well most of the time this may correspond to the cases in which the action was viewed by Sumerian speakers as completed or non completed with respect to the present moment The imperative mood The imperative mood construction is produced with a แธซamแนญu stem but using the maru agreement pattern by turning all prefixes into suffixes In the plural the second person plural ending is attached in a form that differs slightly from the indicative it is n zen with the n appearing only after vowels The stem is singular even in the plural imperative Compare the following indicative imperative pairs Indicative Imperative๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ mu un na ab sum2 mumu VEN nn 3 SG AN a DAT b 3 INAN O sum give e 3 AN A mu nn a b sum e VEN 3 SG AN DAT 3 INAN O give 3 AN A He will give it to him here ๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š sum2 mu un na absum give mu VEN nn 3 SG AN a DAT b 3 INAN O sum mu nn a b give VEN 3 SG AN DAT 3 INAN O Give it to him here ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’‹ง๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ข๐’‚— mu un na ab sum2 mu un ze2 enmu VEN nn 3 SG AN a DAT b 3 INAN O sum give enzen 2 PL mu nn a b sum enzen VEN 3 SG AN DAT 3 INAN O give 2 PL You plur will give it to him ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’ข๐’‚— sum2 mu un na ab ze2 ensum give mu VEN nn 3 SG AN a DAT b 3 INAN O zen 2 PL A S IMP sum mu nn a b zen give VEN 3 SG AN DAT 3 INAN O 2 PL A S IMP Give plur it to him here This may be compared with the French pair vous le lui donnez but donnez le lui In addition the prefix ๐’‰Œ i3 is replaced by a ๐’‰Œ๐’บ i3 g en he went but ๐’บ๐’ˆพ g en na go ๐’…”๐’ˆพ๐’€Š๐’‰ in na ab be2 he will say it to him but ๐’…—๐’‚ต๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ ๐’€Š dug4 ga an na ab say it to him However the vowel e and possibly i occasionally also occur if no further prefixes follow perhaps as a characteristic of southern dialects The ventive prefix mu if not followed by others has the form ๐’Œ um in the imperative ๐’บ๐’Œ re6 um bring it here In Old Babylonian texts the reduced form u and the more regular am a m are also found ๐’‚ท๐’‰ก g e26 nu ๐’บ๐’€€๐’€ญ g en am3 both come here Participles Sumerian participles can function both as verbal adjectives and as verbal nouns As verbal adjectives they can describe any participant involved in the action or state expressed by the verb for instance ๐’‹ง๐’ˆ  sum2 ma may mean either which was given to someone who was given something or who gave As verbal nouns they denote the action or state itself so ๐’‹ง๐’ˆ  sum2 ma may also mean the act of giving or the fact that X gave Y Participles are formed in the following ways The bare แธซamแนญu stem can function as a participle It usually expresses timeless truths ๐’‹ง sum2 may be a person who regularly constantly gives something regularly given or the regular act of giving Another way to form participles is by means of adding the nominalizing marker a to the แธซamแนญu stem ๐’‹ง๐’ˆ  sum2 ma given The verb form constructed in this way characterizes an entity with a specific action or state in the past or a state in the present ๐’‹พ๐’†ท til3 la alive The verbs ๐’Œ‡ tuku have and ๐’ช zu know usually omit the ending a as does the verb ๐’€ ak do According to Jagersma the nominalizing marker had the effect of geminating the preceding consonant e g sumหa which is evident from Akkadian loanwords and this effect was due to its original form being ส”a with a glottal stop that later assimilated to preceding consonants sumส”a gt sumหa The maru stem can be combined with the suffix ed to form another participle which often has a future and modal meaning similar to the Latin gerundive e g ๐’ถ๐’ˆจ dim2 me d which will should be made Adding a locative terminative marker e after the ed yields a form with a meaning similar to the Latin ad gerund acc construction ๐’ถ ๐’ˆจ ๐’‰ˆ dim2 me de3 in order to make A similar meaning can be expressed by adding the locative marker ๐’ถ ๐’ˆจ ๐’• dim2 me da for it to be made The main difference is that in the construction with ed e the subject of the intended action is the same as the subject of the main clause while it is different in the construction with ed a The analysis of this participle is controversial along the same lines as that of the meaning of the suffix ed in finite forms see above Some Sumerologists describe its meaning as primarily modal and distinguish it from a separate imperfective participle that consists of the maru stem alone e g ๐’ถ๐’ˆจ dim2 me which is was making ๐’„„๐’„„ gi4 gi4 returning Others believe that it this is also the normal maru participle and that it has in addition the imperfective meanings which is was cutting and which is was being cut Besides the allomorphy of the suffix ed already treated above the verb ๐’…— dug4 do say has a suppletive participial stem in this form ๐’ฒ di d The maru stem can also occur with the suffix a Nonetheless according to Jagersma this form is rare outside the combination with a following possessive pronominal marker to express temporal meaning as explained in the Syntax section e g ๐’ถ ๐’ˆจ ๐’•๐’‰Œ dim2 me da ni when he makes something Copula verb The copula verb me to be is mostly used in an enclitic form Its conjugation is as follows singular plural1st person ๐’ˆจ๐’‚— me en ๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’‰ˆ๐’‚— me en de3 en2nd person ๐’ˆจ๐’‚— me en ๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— me en ze2 en3rd person ๐’€€๐’€ญ am3 Old Sumerian ๐’€ญ am6 ๐’€ญ๐’ˆจ๐’Œ me es In addition the initial vowel of the form am3 is reduced to m after enclitics ending in a vowel ๐’‚๐’ˆฌ๐’Œ e2 g u10 um it is my house Like other final consonants the m may not be expressed in early spelling These enclitic forms are used instead of a simple sequence of finite prefix root and personal suffix i3 me en i me etc For more complex forms the independent copula form is used ๐’‰Œ๐’ˆจ๐’€€ i3 me a that he is ๐’‰ก๐’…‡๐’ˆจ๐’‚— nu u3 me en I am not Unlike the enclitic it typically uses the normal stem ๐’ˆจ me in the 3rd person singular ๐’€๐’Š๐’ˆจ ba ra me should not be except for the form prefixed with แธซa which is ๐’ƒถ๐’…Ž แธซe2 em or ๐’ƒถ๐’€€๐’€ญ แธซe2 am3 For a negative equivalent of the copula in the 3rd person it seems that the word ๐’‰ก nu not alone instead of nu um is used predicatively e g ๐’๐’‰ก urud nu it is not copper although the form ๐’‰ก ๐’Œฆ ๐’‚ต๐’€€๐’€ญ nu un ga am3 it is also not is attested A different word is used to express existence or being present located somewhere ๐’…… g al2 A peculiar feature of the copula is that it seems to form a relative clause without the nominalizing suffix a and thus uses the finite form thus instead of ๐’‰Œ๐’ˆจ๐’€€ i3 me a simply ๐’€€๐’€ญ am3 is used ๐’†ฌ๐’ƒป๐’‚ต๐’Š๐’‰Œ๐’…Ž๐’ˆ ๐’€ญ๐’‹ง kug nig 2 gur11 ra ni im ma an sum2 he gave me silver which was his property which appears to say The silver was his property he gave it to me In the negative the full form ๐’‰ก๐’ˆจ๐’€€ nu me a which is not is used and likewise in non relative functions Passive voice Some scholars believe that it is possible to speak of a passive voice in Sumerian Jagersma 2010 distinguishes three attested passive constructions In each case the ergative participant and the corresponding agreement marker on the verb are removed so that the verb is inflected intransitively but there may also be some additional cues to ensure a passive interpretation The passive may be formed By simply eliminating the agent of a transitive verb and the corresponding agreement marker engar e e i n ru the farmer built the house gt e i ru the house was built As a dynamic passive in reference to the event itself this construction is obsolete in แธซamแนญu by the time of the earliest records according to Jagersma However it is still used with modal prefixes and in maru e g e แธซa i ru May the house be built Moreover it continues to be used as a stative passive in Southern Sumerian so e i ru can mean the house is built i e complete With the prefix ๐’€ ba e g e ba ru This is only found in Southern Sumerian and expresses only a dynamic passive i e it refers to the event itself The house was came to be built With the prefix a e g e al ru This is only found in Northern Sumerian and can have both a stative and a dynamic sense The house is built complete or The house was came to be built The agent is never expressed in the passive clause in Sumerian While the existence of such intransitive constructions of normally transitive verbs is widely recognized some other scholars have disputed the view that these constructions should be called passives They prefer to speak of one participant or agentless constructions and to limit themselves to the observation that the prefixes ba and a tend to be preferred with such constructions apparently as a secondary effect of another more subtle feature of their meaning Concerning the history of the constructions it has been claimed that the passive like use of ba does not appear before the Ur III period Jagersma on the contrary states that it is attested already in the Old Sumerian period although it becomes especially frequent in Ur III times A different construction has been posited and labelled Sumerian passive voice by a significant number of scholars According to them too a passive is formed by removing the ergative participant and the verbal marker that agrees with it but the verb is not inflected as an intransitive one instead it has a personal prefix which refers to the logical object e i b ru or e ba b ru the house is being built The stem is always แธซamแนญu Some consider this construction to have only the function and meaning of a maru form while others consider the tense aspect opposition to be neutralized in it The personal prefix is nearly always b in identified cases views differ on whether it agrees in gender with an animate logical object appearing as n or whether it remains b Critics have argued that most alleged examples of the construction are actually instances of the pre stem personal prefix referring to the directive participant in an intransitive verb at least before the Old Babylonian period Pascal Attinger considers it plausible that the original construction was indeed a directive one whereas its new passive function as described by him arose via a reinterpretation in the Old Babylonian period Walther Sallaberger on the contrary believes this kind of passive to be characteristic of Neo Sumerian and to have been lost in Old Babylonian A further possibility is that at least some of these cases actually have an impersonal 3rd person inanimate subject it has they have built the house Causative construction Sumerian doesn t have dedicated causative morphology Causativity is expressed syntactically in two ways depending on the transitivity of the verb An intransitive verb is made transitive and thus acquires causative meaning merely by adding an ergative participant and the appropriate agreement marker gud i gub the ox stood engar e gud i n gub the farmer made the ox stand A transitive verb is made causative by placing the ergative participant in the directive engar e gud e u b i n gu the farmer made the ox eat grass For animates as usual the directive case marker is replaced by the dative one engar e dumu ra ninda i nn i n gu the farmer made the child eat bread A further example can be dig ir e engar ra gud i nn i n gub the god made the farmer make the ox stand The causative constructions can in turn be passivized using the prefix ba gud ba gub the ox was caused to stand gud e u ba b gu the ox was caused to eat grass lit grass was caused to be eaten by the ox dumu ra ninda ba n gu the child was caused to eat bread In Old Babylonian Sumerian new causative markers have been claimed to have arisen under the influence of Akkadian this is explained in the section on Interference from Akkadian and other late phenomena Phrasal verbs A specific problem of Sumerian syntax is posed by the numerous phrasal verbs traditionally called compound verbs in Sumerology in spite of the fact that they are not compounds but idiomatic combinations They usually involve a noun immediately before the verb forming a lexical idiomatic unit e g ๐’…† ๐’‚ƒ igi du8 lit open the eye see look Their case government and agreement patterns vary depending on the specific verb The component noun is usually in the absolutive case but may be in the directive If the phrasal verb takes another noun as a logical object the verbal infix is typically the directive while the noun case is most commonly either the directive dative if animate which otherwise has the meaning at with respect to or the locative dative if animate which otherwise has the meaning on Directive ๐’…† ๐’‚ƒ igi du8 NOUN e igi e i du lit open the eye at something gt see ๐’†ฅ ๐’€ kig 2 ak lit do work with respect to something gt work on something ๐’‹—๐’‹ณ ๐’…— su tag dug4 lit do hand touching with respect to something gt decorate ๐’Š“ ๐’…— sa2 dug4 lit do equal with respect to something gt reach ๐’„‘ ๐’‹ณ g es tag lit make wood touch at something gt sacrifice something ๐’‹› ๐’ฒ si sa2 NOUN e si e i sa lit make the horns equal with respect to something gt put something in order likewise used intransitively NOUN e si b i sa lit the horns are equal with respect to something gt something is in order Locative on ๐’…— ๐’ƒป inim g ar NOUN a inim e i g ar lit place a word on something gt claim place a claim on ๐’‹— ๐’‡ su bar lit open remove the hand on something gt release ๐’ˆฌ ๐’„ท๐’ˆฟ mu sa4 lit call a name on someone gt to name ๐’‰† ๐’‹ป nam tar lit cut a fate upon someone gt determine the fate of someone ๐’€  ๐’†• al ru2 lit raise the hoe upon something gt dig ๐’‡ท ๐’‹ป en3 tar lit cut a question on something gt investigate Less commonly the case of the logical object and the pronominal infix may be Dative directive if inanimate ๐’†  ๐’‰˜ ki ag 2 NOUN ra ki ag lit to measure out a place for someone to love someone ๐’…— ๐’Œฃ gu3 de2 lit to pour out the voice for someone to call for someone ๐’€€ ๐’Š’ a ru lit to eject water for someone to dedicate something to someone Terminative ๐’…† ๐’‡ igi bar NOUN se igi bar lit bring out the eye towards something see look Comitative ๐’€‰ ๐’‰˜ a2 ag 2 NOUN da a ag lit measure out power with someone to give orders to someone Locative in ๐’‹— ๐’ su gid2 NOUN a su gid lit stretch out the hand into something to perform extispicy on ๐’‹— ๐’„ su bala lit let one s hand go across in something alter Another possibility is for the component noun to be in the dative directive if inanimate while the object is in the absolutive ๐’‹— ๐’‹พ su ti su e NOUN ti lit make something come close to the hand to receive something from someone is expressed by the terminative NOUN2 se su e NOUN1 ti Syntax General features The basic word order is subject object verb verb finality is only violated in rare instances in poetry The moving of a constituent towards the beginning of the phrase may be a way to highlight it as may the addition of the copula to it Modifiers adjectives genitive phrases etc are normally placed after the noun ๐’‚๐’‰‹ e2 gibil a new house ๐’‚๐’ˆ—๐’†ท e2 lugal la the house of the owner However the so called anticipatory genitive ๐’‚๐’€€๐’ˆ—๐’‰ˆ e2 a lugal bi the owner of the house lit of the house its owner is common and may signal the possessor s topicality There are no adpositions but noun phrases in a certain case may resemble prepositions and have a similar function ๐’Šฎ ๐’€€๐’…— sag4 X a ka lit in the heart of X inside among X ๐’…† ๐’€€๐’‚  igi X a se3 lit for the eyes of X in front of X ๐’‚• ๐’€€๐’…— egir X a ka lit at the back of X behind after X ๐’€€๐’…— ๐’€€๐’…— X ugu2 X a ka lit on the skull of X on top of X concerning X ๐’‡ ๐’€€๐’…— bar X a ka lit outside of X because of X in Old Sumerian ๐’ˆฌ ๐’‰† ๐’€€๐’‚  mu nam X a se3 lit for the name fate of X because of X in Neo Sumerian Subordinate clauses There are various ways to express subordination Many of them include the nominalization of a finite verb with the suffix a which is also used to form participles as shown above Like the participles this nominalized clause can either modify a noun as adjectives do or refer to the event itself as nouns do It usually functions as a relative clause corresponding to an English clause with which or who as in the following example ๐’‡ฝ๐’‚๐’…”๐’†•๐’€€ lu2 e2 in ru2 alu mane housei n ru a FIN 3 A build NMLZ lu e i n ru a man house FIN 3 A build NMLZ the man who built the house Like the participles the relative clauses can describe any participant involved in the action or state expressed by the verb and the specific participant is determined by context e g ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’ˆพ๐’€ญ๐’‹ง๐’ˆ  mu nna n sum a can be which he gave to him who gave something to him etc The nominalized clause can also be a complement clause corresponding to an English clause with that e g e2 in ru2 a in zu he knows that he built the house Like a noun it can be followed by case morphemes In the locative case with added ๐’€€ a it means when e2 in ru2 a a when he built the house more literally in his building of the house although this is more common in Old Sumerian In the ablative case with added ๐’‹ซ ta it means after or since e2 in ru2 a ta after he built the house the particle ๐’Š‘ ri may express the same meaning as ๐’‹ซ ta In the terminative case with added ๐’‚  se3 it has a meaning close to before or as to the fact that e2 nu ru2 a se3 while he had not yet built the house In the equative case with added ๐’ถ gen7 it can mean as if as when when or because e2 in ru2 a gen7 as he built the house It can also host the enclitics akanam and akes because e2 in ru2 a ka nam because he built the house More surprisingly it can add both the genitive and the locative morpheme with a meaning close to when possibly as soon as e2 in ru2 a a ka as soon as he built the house The nominalized clause can directly modify a noun expressing time such as ๐’Œ“ ud day time ๐’ˆฌ mu year and ๐’Œ— itid month and this in turn can then stand in the locative and ablative in the same meanings as the clauses themselves ud e2 in ru2 a a ta when after he built the house In this case the particle bi sometimes precedes the case morpheme ud e2 in ru2 a ba the basic meaning is still of when The nominalized clause can also be included in the various prepositional constructions mentioned above bar e2 in ru2 a ka because he built the house in Old Sumerian mu X a se3 because he built the house in Neo Sumerian egir e2 in ru2 a ka after he built the house The structure is shown more clearly in the following example ๐’‚•๐’€€๐’ˆ ๐’Š’๐’€๐’ƒก๐’Š๐’‹ซ egir a ma ru ba ur3 ra taegir backamaru floodba ur a ak ta MID sweep over NMLZ GEN ABL egir amaru ba ur a ak ta back flood MID sweep over NMLZ GEN ABL after the Flood had swept over Several clauses can be nominalized by a single a enclitic kaสพa ba zaแธซ engar e nu i b dab a b i n dug he said that the fox had escaped and the farmer had not caught it Participles can function in a very similar way to the nominalized clauses and be combined with the same kinds of adjuncts One peculiarity is that unlike nominalized clauses they may also express the agent as a possessor in the genitive case ๐’‚๐’†•๐’€€๐’ˆ—๐’†ท e2 ru2 a lugal la the house built by the king However when the head noun e2 is specified as here a more common construction uses the ergative ๐’‚๐’ˆ—๐’‚Š๐’†•๐’€€ e2 lugal e ru2 a A special subordinating construction with the temporal meaning of an English when clause is the so called pronominal conjugation which contains a verb nominalized with a and following possessive pronominal markers referring to the subject transitive or intransitive In the 3rd person the form appears to end in the possessive pronominal marker alone ๐’†ญ๐’Š๐’‰Œ kur9 ra ni when he entered lit his entering etc It has been suggested that these forms actually also contain a final directive marker e in this example the analysis would be kur a ni e at his entering Similarly in Old Babylonian Sumerian one sometimes finds the locative or ablative markers after the possessive kur9 ra na kur9 ra ni ta In contrast in the 1st and 2nd persons the 1st and 2nd person pronouns are followed by the syllable ๐’‰ˆ ne ๐’ฃ๐’‚ต๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ zig3 ga g u10 ne as I rose The verb itself may be in แธซamแนญu as in the above examples or in maru followed by the modal imperfective suffix ed ๐’ฃ๐’ฃ๐’•๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ zi zi da g u10 ne when I rise The same construction is used with the word ๐’€ธ dili alone ๐’€ธ๐’ˆฌ๐’‰ˆ dili g u10 ne I alone etc Subordinating conjunctions such as ๐’Œ“๐’• ud da when if ๐’‹—๐’ƒป๐’Œ‰๐’‡ฒ๐’‰ tukum bi if and ๐’‚—๐’ˆพ en na until also exist Coordination Coordinating conjunctions are rarely used The most common way to express the sense of and is by simple juxtaposition Nominal phrases may be conjoined perhaps emphatically by adding ๐’‰ bi to the second one ๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’€ญ๐’Ž๐’†ค๐’‰Œ en lil2 nin lil2 bi both Enlil and Ninlil sometimes the enclitic is further reinforced by ๐’• da with More surprisingly ๐’‹ซ ta from is also sometimes used in the sense of and The word ๐’…‡ u3 and was borrowed from Akkadian in the Old Akkadian period and occurs mostly in relatively colloquial texts Old Babylonian Sumerian also borrowed from Akkadian the enclitic ๐’ˆ  ma and There is no conjunction or and its sense can also be expressed by simple juxtaposition a more explicit and emphatic alternative is the repetition of ๐’ƒถ๐’…Ž แธซe2 em let it be ๐’‡ป๐’ƒถ๐’…Ž๐’ˆง๐’ƒถ๐’…Ž udu แธซe2 em mas แธซe2 em be it a sheep or a goat Other issues A quotative particle e se or si saying variously spelt ๐’‚  ese2 ๐’…† si or ๐’€ช๐’Šบ e se has been identified Its use is not obligatory and it is attested only or almost only in texts from the Old Babylonian period or later Another rarely attested particle ๐’„‘ ๐’Šบ ๐’‚— g es se en apparently expresses irrealis modality were it that Highlighting uses of the copula somewhat similar to English cleft constructions are present ๐’ˆ—๐’€€๐’€ญ๐’‰Œ๐’บ lugal am3 i3 g en It is the king who came ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’€ธ๐’€€๐’€ญ๐’‰Œ๐’บ a na as am3 i3 g en Why is it that he came ๐’‰Œ๐’บ๐’ˆพ๐’€€๐’€ญ i3 g en It is the case that he came Sumerian generally links a nominal predicate to the subject using the copula verb like English However it does use zero copula constructions in some contexts In interrogative sentences the 3rd person copula is omitted ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’ˆฌ๐’ช a na mu zu What is your name ๐’‰ˆ๐’‚—๐’ˆฌ๐’ช ne en mu zu Is this your name Sumerian proper names that consist of entire sentences normally lack a copula as well e g ๐’€€๐’€๐’€ญ๐’Œ“๐’ถ a ba dutu gen7 Who is like Utu As explained above negative sentences also omit the copula in nu am3 nu um isn t and use simply ๐’‰ก nu instead Yes no interrogative sentences appear to have been marked only by intonation and possibly by resulting lengthening of final vowels There is no wh movement to the beginning of the clause but the interrogative words are placed immediately before the verb e g ๐’ˆ—๐’‚Š๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’ˆฌ๐’Œฆ๐’€ lugal e a na mu un ak What did the king do ๐’‚๐’€€๐’€๐’€€๐’…”๐’†• e2a ba a in ru3 Who built the temple Two exceptions from this are that the constituent noun of a phrasal verb is normally closer to the verb and that an interrogative word emphasized with a copula such as ๐’€€๐’ˆพ๐’€ธ๐’€€๐’€ญ a na as am3 why is it that is placed at the beginning of the clause In addition as already mentioned interrogative sentences omit the copula where a declarative would have used it Word formation Derivation by affixation is largely non existent An exception may be a few nouns ending in u denoting the object of a corresponding verb ๐’Šฌ๐’Š’ sar ru document lt ๐’Šฌ sar write Compounding on the other hand is common in nouns Compounds are normally left headed The dependent may be Another noun ๐’‚ e2 house ๐’ˆฌ muแธซaldim cook gt ๐’‚๐’ˆฌ e2 muแธซaldim kitchen An adjective ๐’Œจ ur dog ๐’ˆคmaแธซ great gt ๐’Œจ๐’ˆค ur maแธซ lion A participle consisting of the bare verb stem ๐’ƒป nig 2 thing ๐’€ ba give n gt ๐’ƒป๐’€ nig 2 ba present A participle with a dependent word ๐’ƒป nig 2 thing ๐’ฃ zi breath ๐’…… g al2 be there gt ๐’ƒป๐’ฃ๐’…… nig 2 zi g al2 living thing An older obsolete pattern was right headed instead ๐’‚ e2 house ๐’Šฎ sag4 heart gt ๐’‚๐’Šฎ e2 sag4 innermost part of a house ๐’ƒฒ gal big ๐’ˆœ nar musician gt ๐’ƒฒ๐’ˆœ gal nar chief musician A participle may be the head of the compound preceded by a dependent ๐’พ dub clay tablet ๐’Šฌ sar write gt ๐’พ๐’Šฌ dub sar scribe ๐’‹— su hand ๐’‹ณ tag touch gt ๐’‹—๐’‹ณ su tag decoration corresponding to the phrasal verb ๐’‹— ๐’‹ณ su tag decorate There are a few cases of nominalized finite verbs too ๐’€๐’— ba us4 who has died gt dead Abstract nouns are formed as compounds headed by the word ๐’‰† nam fate status ๐’Œ‰ dumu child gt ๐’‰†๐’Œ‰ nam dumu childhood ๐’‹ป tar cut decide gt ๐’‰†๐’‹ป nam tar fate Nouns that express the object of an action or an object possessing a characteristic are formed as compounds headed by the word ๐’ƒป nig 2 thing ๐’…ฅ gu4 eat gt ๐’ƒป๐’…ฅ nig 2 gu7 food ๐’„ญ good sweet gt ๐’ƒป๐’„ญ nig 2 dug something sweet The meaning may also be abstract ๐’‹› ๐’ฒ si sa2 straighten put in order gt nig 2 si sa2 justice A small number of terms of professions are derived with the preposed element ๐’‰ก nu ๐’„‘๐’Šฌ g eskiri6 garden gt ๐’‰ก๐’„‘๐’Šฌ nu g eskiri6 k gardener Apparent coordinative compounds also exist e g ๐’€ญ๐’†  an ki the universe lit heaven and earth A noun can be formed from an adjective by conversion for example ๐’‚ผ dag al wide also means width On verbs acquiring the properties of adjectives and nouns agent nouns and action nouns see the section on Participles While new verbs cannot be derived verbal meanings may be expressed by phrasal verbs see above in particular new phrasal verbs are often formed on the basis of nouns by making them the object of the verbs ๐’…— dug4 do or ๐’€ ak make ๐’€€ ๐’…— a dug4 lit to do water gt to irrigate ๐’„‘๐’‚ต ๐’ฎ g esga rig2 ak lit to do the comb gt to comb DialectsThe standard variety of Sumerian was Emegir ๐’…ด๐’‚  eme gir15 A notable variety or sociolect was Emesal ๐’…ด๐’Šฉ eme sal possibly to be interpreted as fine tongue or high pitched voice Other apparent terms for registers or dialects were eme galam high tongue eme si sa2 straight tongue eme te na2 oblique tongue emesukudda emesuha emesidi and emeku Recently a regional differentiation into a Northern and a Southern Sumerian dialect area has been posited Emesal Emesal is used exclusively by female characters in some literary texts In addition it is dominant in certain genres of cult songs such as the hymns sung by Gala priests It has been argued that it might have been a female language variety of the kind that exists or has existed in some cultures such as among the Chukchis and the Garifuna Alternatively it has been contended that it must have been originally a regional dialect since instances of apparent Emesal like forms are attested in the area of late 3rd millennium Lagash and some loanwords into Akkadian appear to come from Emesal rather than Emegir Apart from such isolated glosses Emesal is first attested in writing in the early Old Babylonian period It is typically written with syllable signs rather than logograms A text is often not written consistently in Emesal but contains apparent Emegir forms as well The special features of Emesal are mostly phonological and lexical In terms of phonology the following are some of the most common sound correspondences Emegir sound Emesal sound Emegir example Emesal example Meaningg ล‹ m ๐’‚ท g e26 ๐’ˆจ me I d z ๐’‡ป udu ๐’‚Š๐’ข e ze2 sheep g b ๐’…† igi ๐’„ฟ๐’‰ˆ i bi2 eye i u ๐’‰บ๐’‡ป sipad ๐’ป๐’€ su8 ba shepherd There are also specifically Emesal lexemes that do not seem to be cognate with their Emegir counterparts for example Emegir Emesal๐’Ž nin ๐’‚ต๐’Šญ๐’€ญ ga sa an later spelling ๐’ƒฝ gasan lady ๐’€€๐’ˆพ a na ๐’‹ซ ta what ๐’บ tum2 ๐’…• ir bring In grammar both the cohortative prefix ๐’‚ต ga and the precative prefix ๐’„ฉ แธซa are replaced by the morpheme ๐’• da with the allomorphs ๐’‰ˆ de3 and ๐’‚… du5 conditioned by context in the same way as that of the corresponding Emegir prefixes Southern and Northern Sumerian Bram Jagersma and Gabor Zolyomi distinguish two regional dialects of Sumerian the Southern Sumerian dialect of Lagash Umma Ur and Uruk which eventually formed the basis for the common standard of the Neo Sumerian Ur III period and the Northern Sumerian dialect as seen in texts from Nippur Adab Isin and Shuruppak although eventually texts in the standard variety begin to be produced in that area as well The differences that he finds between the two varieties are In Southern Sumerian the conjugation prefix ๐’‰Œ i alternated with ๐’‚Š e in accordance with vowel harmony during the Old Sumerian period while Northern Sumerian only had i Later Southern Sumerian generalized i as well In Southern Sumerian the conjugation prefix expressing the passive was ๐’€ ba while in Northern Sumerian it was ๐’€€ a In Southern Sumerian after the Old Akkadian period the conjugation prefix ๐’€€ a which had originally existed in both dialects disappears entirely apart from the variant ๐’€  al which only appears in subordinate clauses In Southern Sumerian the Old Sumerian phoneme r merged with r while in Northern Sumerian it merged with d Old Babylonian Sumerian The dominant Sumerian variety of the Old Babylonian period in turn reflected a different regional dialect from the standard Neo Sumerian of the Ur III period Neo Sumerian elides the conjugation prefixes ๐’‰Œ i and ๐’€€ a in front of the prefixes ๐’‰Œ ni ๐’Š ra and ๐’Š‘ ri while Old Babylonian Sumerian retains them The original sequence ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š mu e consisting of the ventive conjugation prefix ๐’ˆฌ mu and the 2nd person prefix ๐’‚Š e is contracted into ๐’ˆฌ muห in the Ur III standard but into ๐’ˆจ meห in the most common Old Babylonian variety In general Old Babylonian Sumerian preserved many features of Northern Sumerian in contrast to the decidedly Southern character of the Ur III standard This is doubtlessly connected to the fact that the centre of power in Babylonia moved to the north In particular it uses spellings that show that its reflex of the Old Sumerian r phoneme is d Interference from Akkadian and other late phenomenaIn the Old Babylonian period and after it the Sumerian used by scribes was influenced by their mother tongue Akkadian and sometimes more generally by imperfect acquisition of the language As a result various deviations from its original structure occur in texts or copies of texts from these times The following effects have been found in the Old Babylonian period confusion of the animate and inanimate gender resulting in use of incorrect gender pronouns occasional use of the animate plural ene with inanimates occasional use of the directive case marker e with animates changes in the use of the nominal case markers so as to parallel the use of Akkadian prepositions whereas the verbal case markers remain unchanged resulting in mismatches between nominal and verbal case generalized use of terminative se to express direction displacing locative a as the expression of illative and sublative meanings into and onto and directive e as the expression of achieving contiguity with something treatment of the prefix sequences b i and n i which originally could mark the causee in transitive verbs as causative markers even with intransitive verbs dropping of final m in the copula am and sometimes its replacement with e occurrence of e as a maru 3rd person singular marker even in intransitive verbs occurrence of n as a transitive subject prefix in forms with a 1st and rarely also 2nd person ergative participant occurrence of pre stem pronominal prefixes in แธซamแนญu referring to an intransitive subject occasional incorporation of the constituent noun of the phrasal verb into the verb stem e g ki ag 2 or ki ki ag 2 instead of ki ag 2 to love confusion of the locative case a and the directive case e as well as the various prefix case combinations occasional use of the ergative directive ending e instead of the genitive case marker a k For Middle Babylonian and later texts additional deviations have been noted loss of the contrast between the phonemes g g and g ล‹ with the latter merging into the former and use of the signs for g also for words with original g omission of the ergative marker e and apparent loss of the notion of an ergative case use of ๐’†ค ke4 originally expressing a sequence of the genitive marker ak and the ergative marker e simply as a marker of the genitive equivalent to a k alone use of the ablative ta instead of the locative a omission of the genitive marker a k use of infrequent words sometimes inappropriately apparently extracted from lexical lists use of Emesal forms in non Emesal contexts e g umun lord and gasan lady instead of ๐’‚— en and ๐’Ž nin moreover written with the innovated logograms ๐’Œ‹ and ๐’ƒฝ respectively SyllabaryThe table below shows signs used for simple syllables of the form CV or VC As used for the Sumerian language the cuneiform script was in principle capable of distinguishing at least 16 consonants transliterated as b d g g แธซ k l m n p r r s s t z as well as four vowel qualities a e i u Sale of a number of fields probably from Isin c 2600 BC Sumerian CV and VC syllabic glyphs Ca Ce Ci Cu aC eC iC uCa ๐’€€ a ๐’€‰ e ๐’‚Š e ๐’‚ i ๐’„ฟ i IA i NI ๐’‰Œ u ๐’Œ‹ u ๐’Œ‘ u ๐’…‡ a ๐’€€ a ๐’€‰ e ๐’‚Š e ๐’‚ i ๐’„ฟ i IA i NI ๐’‰Œ u ๐’Œ‹ u ๐’Œ‘ u ๐’…‡b ba ๐’€ ba PA ๐’‰บ ba ES ๐’Œ be BAD ๐’ be BI ๐’‰ be NI ๐’‰Œ bi ๐’‰ bi NE ๐’‰ˆ bi PI ๐’‰ฟ bu ๐’ bu KASKAL ๐’†œ bu PU ๐’…ค ab ๐’€Š ab ๐’€– eb IB ๐’… eb TUM ๐’Œˆ ib ๐’… ib TUM ๐’Œˆ ub ๐’Œ’ ub SE ๐’‚  bd da ๐’• da TA ๐’‹ซ de DI ๐’ฒ de ๐’Œฃ de NE ๐’‰ˆ di ๐’ฒ di TI ๐’„ญ du ๐’บ du TU ๐’Œ… du GAG ๐’†• du4 TUM ๐’Œˆ ad ๐’€œ ad ๐’„‰ ed A ๐’€‰ id A ๐’€‰ id A ENGUR ๐’€€๐’‡‰ ud ๐’Œ“ ud AS ๐’€พ dg ga ๐’‚ต ga ๐’‚ท ge GI ๐’„€ ge KID ๐’†ค ge DIS ๐’น gi ๐’„€ gi KID ๐’†ค gi DIS ๐’น gi4 ๐’„„ gi5 KI ๐’†  gu ๐’„– gu ๐’„˜ gu KA ๐’…— gu4 ๐’„ž gu5 KU ๐’†ช gu6 NAG ๐’…˜ gu7 ๐’…ฅ ag ๐’€ ag ๐’‰˜ eg IG ๐’…… eg E ๐’‚Š ig ๐’…… ig E ๐’‚Š ug ๐’ŠŒ gแธซ แธซa ๐’„ฉ แธซa แธชI A ๐’„ญ๐’€€ แธซa U ๐’Œ‹ แธซa4 แธชI ๐’„ญ แธซe แธชI ๐’„ญ แธซe GAN ๐’ƒถ แธซi ๐’„ญ แธซi GAN ๐’ƒถ แธซu ๐’„ท aแธซ ๐’„ด aแธซ SES ๐’‹€ eแธซ Aแธช ๐’„ด iแธซ Aแธช ๐’„ด uแธซ Aแธช ๐’„ด uแธซ ๐’Œ” แธซk ka ๐’…— ka ๐’† ka GA ๐’‚ต ke KI ๐’†  ke GI ๐’„€ ki ๐’†  ki GI ๐’„€ ku ๐’†ช ๐’‚  ku GU7๐’…ฅ ku ๐’†ฌ ku4 ๐’†ญ ak AG ๐’€ ek IG ๐’…… ik IG ๐’…… uk UG ๐’ŠŒ kl la ๐’†ท la LAL ๐’‡ฒ la NU ๐’‰ก le LI ๐’‡ท le NI ๐’‰Œ li ๐’‡ท li NI ๐’‰Œ lu ๐’‡ป lu ๐’‡ฝ al ๐’€  al ALAM ๐’€ฉ el ๐’‚– el IL ๐’…‹ il ๐’…‹ il ๐’… ul ๐’ŒŒ ul NU ๐’‰ก lm ma ๐’ˆ  ma ๐’ˆฃ me ๐’ˆจ me MI ๐’ˆช me ๐’€ž ๐’…  mi ๐’ˆช mi MUNUS ๐’Šฉ mi ME ๐’ˆจ mu ๐’ˆฌ mu SAR ๐’Šฌ am ๐’„  ๐’‚” am AG ๐’‰˜ em IM ๐’…Ž im ๐’…Ž im KAS4๐’ฝ um ๐’Œ um UD ๐’Œ“ mn na ๐’ˆพ na ๐’ˆฟ na AG ๐’€ na4 NI UD ๐’‰Œ๐’Œ“ ne ๐’‰ˆ ne NI ๐’‰Œ ni ๐’‰Œ ni IM ๐’‰Ž nu ๐’‰ก nu NA ๐’ˆฟ an ๐’€ญ en ๐’‚— en ๐’‹™๐’€ญ en LI ๐’‡ท in ๐’…” in4 EN ๐’‚— in5 NIN ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ† un ๐’Œฆ un U ๐’Œ‹ np pa ๐’‰บ pa BA ๐’€ pa PAD3๐’…†๐’Š’ pe PI ๐’‰ฟ pe BI ๐’‰ pi ๐’‰ฟ pi BI ๐’‰ pi BAD ๐’ pu BU ๐’ pu TUL ๐’‡ฅ pu ๐’…ค ap AB ๐’€Š ep IB ๐’… ep TUM ๐’Œˆ ip IB ๐’… ip TUM ๐’Œˆ up UB ๐’Œ’ up SE ๐’‚  pr ra ๐’Š ra DU ๐’บ re RI ๐’Š‘ re URU ๐’Œท re LAGAB ๐’†ธ ri ๐’Š‘ ri URU ๐’Œท ri LAGAB ๐’†ธ ru ๐’Š’ ru GAG ๐’†• ru AS ๐’€ธ ar ๐’…ˆ ar UB ๐’Œ’ er IR ๐’…• ir ๐’…• ir A IGI ๐’€€๐’…† ur ๐’Œจ ur ๐’Œซ rs sa ๐’Š“ sa DI ๐’ฒ sa ZA ๐’ sa4 แธชU NA ๐’„ท๐’ˆพ se SI ๐’‹› se ZI ๐’ฃ si ๐’‹› si ZI ๐’ฃ su ๐’‹ข su ZU ๐’ช su SUD ๐’‹ค su4 ๐’‹œ as AZ ๐’Š es GIS ๐’„‘ es ES ๐’‚  is GIS ๐’„‘ is ES ๐’‚  us UZ ๐’Šป us US ๐’‘ us ๐’‡‡ ss sa ๐’Šญ sa NIG sa ๐’Šฎ se ๐’Šบ se se ๐’‚  si IGI ๐’…† si SI ๐’‹› su ๐’‹— su ๐’‹™ su SE ๐’‚  su4 U ๐’Œ‹ as ๐’€ธ as ๐’€พ es ๐’Œ es SE ๐’‚  is ๐’…– is KASKAL ๐’†œ us ๐’‘ us BAD ๐’ st ta ๐’‹ซ ta DA ๐’• te ๐’‹ผ te TI ๐’Šน ti ๐’‹พ ti ๐’Šน ti DIM ๐’ด ti4 DI ๐’ฒ tu ๐’Œ… tu UD ๐’Œ“ tu DU ๐’บ at AD ๐’€œ at GIR gunu ๐’„‰ et A ๐’€‰ it A ๐’€‰ ut UD ๐’Œ“ ut AS ๐’€พ tz za ๐’ za NA4๐’‰Œ๐’Œ“ ze ZI ๐’ฃ ze ZI ๐’ข zi ๐’ฃ zi ๐’ข zi ๐’ฅ zu ๐’ช zu KA ๐’…— az ๐’Š ez GIS ๐’„‘ ez ES ๐’‚  iz GIS ๐’„‘ iz IS ๐’…– uz SE amp HU ๐’Šป uz US ๐’‘ uz ๐’š zg g a GA ๐’‚ท g e26 GA ๐’‚ท g i6 MI ๐’ˆช g u10 MU ๐’ˆฌ ag AG ๐’‰˜ eg AG ๐’‰˜ ig AG ๐’‰˜ ug UN ๐’Œฆ g r ra DU ๐’บ re6 DU ๐’บ rSample textInscription by Entemena of Lagas This text was inscribed on a small clay cone c 2400 BC It recounts the beginning of a war between the city states of Lagas and Umma during the Early Dynastic III period one of the earliest border conflicts recorded RIME 1 09 05 01 Cone of Enmetena king of Lagash Room 236 Reference AO 3004 Louvre Museum I 1 7๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค den lil2๐’ˆ— lugal๐’†ณ๐’†ณ๐’Š kur kur ra๐’€Š๐’€ ab ba๐’€ญ๐’€ญ๐’Œท๐’‰ˆ๐’†ค dig ir dig ir re2 ne ke4๐’…— inim๐’„€๐’ˆพ๐’‰Œ๐’‹ซ gi na ni ta๐’€ญ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ†๐’„ˆ๐’‹ข dnin g ir2 su๐’€ญ๐’‡‹๐’‰ dsara2 bi๐’†  ki๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ๐’‹ฉ e ne sur ๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค ๐’ˆ— ๐’†ณ๐’†ณ๐’Š ๐’€Š๐’€ ๐’€ญ๐’€ญ๐’Œท๐’‰ˆ๐’†ค ๐’…— ๐’„€๐’ˆพ๐’‰Œ๐’‹ซ ๐’€ญ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ†๐’„ˆ๐’‹ข ๐’€ญ๐’‡‹๐’‰ ๐’†  ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ๐’‹ฉ den lil2 lugal kur kur ra ab ba dig ir dig ir re2 ne ke4 inim gi na ni ta dnin g ir2 su dsara2 bi ki e ne sur Enlil king of all the lands father of all the gods by his firm command fixed the border between Ningirsu and Sara 8 12๐’ˆจ๐’ฒ me silim๐’ˆ— lugal๐’†ง๐’† ๐’†ค kiski ke4๐’…— inim๐’€ญ๐’…—๐’ฒ๐’ˆพ๐’‹ซ distaran na ta๐’‚  es2๐’ƒท gana2๐’‰๐’Š be2 ra๐’† ๐’€ ki ba๐’ˆพ na๐’‰ˆ๐’†• bi2 ru2 ๐’ˆจ๐’ฒ ๐’ˆ— ๐’†ง๐’† ๐’†ค ๐’…— ๐’€ญ๐’…—๐’ฒ๐’ˆพ๐’‹ซ ๐’‚  ๐’ƒท ๐’‰๐’Š ๐’† ๐’€ ๐’ˆพ ๐’‰ˆ๐’†• me silim lugal kiski ke4 inim distaran na ta es2 gana2 be2 ra ki ba na bi2 ru2 Mesilim king of Kis at the command of Istaran measured the field and set up a stele there 13 17๐’‘ us๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ensi2๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’†ค ummaki ke4๐’‰† nam๐’…—๐’ˆ  inim ma๐’‹›๐’€€๐’‹›๐’€€๐’‚  dirig dirig se3๐’‚Š๐’€ e ak ๐’‘ ๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’†ค ๐’‰† ๐’…—๐’ˆ  ๐’‹›๐’€€๐’‹›๐’€€๐’‚  ๐’‚Š๐’€ us ensi2 ummaki ke4 nam inim ma dirig dirig se3 e ak Ush ruler of Umma acted unspeakably 18 21๐’ˆพ๐’†•๐’€€๐’‰ na ru2 a bi๐’‰Œ๐’‰ป i3 pad๐’‚” edin๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’† ๐’‚  lagaski se3๐’‰Œ๐’บ i3 g en ๐’ˆพ๐’†•๐’€€๐’‰ ๐’‰Œ๐’‰ป ๐’‚” ๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’† ๐’‚  ๐’‰Œ๐’บ na ru2 a bi i3 pad edin lagaski se3 i3 g en He ripped out that stele and marched toward the plain of Lagas 22 27๐’€ญ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ†๐’„ˆ๐’‹ข dnin g ir2 su๐’Œจ๐’Š• ur sag๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’‡ฒ๐’†ค den lil2 la2 ke4๐’…— inim๐’‹›๐’ฒ๐’‰Œ๐’‹ซ si sa2 ni ta๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’• ummaki da๐’ฎ๐’„ฉ๐’Š dam แธซa ra๐’‚Š๐’•๐’€ e da ak ๐’€ญ๐’Šฉ๐’Œ†๐’„ˆ๐’‹ข ๐’Œจ๐’Š• ๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’‡ฒ๐’†ค ๐’…— ๐’‹›๐’ฒ๐’‰Œ๐’‹ซ ๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’• ๐’ฎ๐’„ฉ๐’Š ๐’‚Š๐’•๐’€ dnin g ir2 su ur sag den lil2 la2 ke4 inim si sa2 ni ta ummaki da dam แธซa ra e da ak Ningirsu warrior of Enlil at his just command made war with Umma 28 31๐’…— inim๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’‡ฒ๐’‹ซ den lil2 la2 ta๐’Š“ sa๐’Œ‹ su4๐’ƒฒ gal๐’‰ˆ๐’Œ‹ bi2 su4๐’…–๐’‡ฏ๐’‹บ๐’‰ SAแธชAR DU6 TAKA4 bi๐’‚”๐’ˆพ eden na๐’†  ki๐’€๐’‰Œ๐’‘๐’‘ ba ni us2 us2 ๐’…— ๐’€ญ๐’‚—๐’†ค๐’‡ฒ๐’‹ซ ๐’Š“ ๐’Œ‹ ๐’ƒฒ ๐’‰ˆ๐’Œ‹ ๐’…–๐’‡ฏ๐’‹บ๐’‰ ๐’‚”๐’ˆพ ๐’†  ๐’€๐’‰Œ๐’‘๐’‘ inim den lil2 la2 ta sa su4 gal bi2 su4 SAแธชAR DU6 TAKA4 bi eden na ki ba ni us2 us2 At Enlil s command he threw his great battle net over it and heaped up burial mounds for it on the plain 32 38๐’‚๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ๐’บ e2 an na tum2๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ensi2๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’†  lagaski๐’‰บ๐’„‘๐’‰‹๐’‚ต pa bil3 ga๐’‚—๐’‹ผ๐’ˆจ๐’ˆพ en mete na๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ensi2๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’† ๐’…—๐’†ค lagaski ka ke4 ๐’‚๐’€ญ๐’ˆพ๐’บ ๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’†  ๐’‰บ๐’„‘๐’‰‹๐’‚ต ๐’‚—๐’‹ผ๐’ˆจ๐’ˆพ ๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ๐’‰ข๐’“๐’†ท๐’† ๐’…—๐’†ค e2 an na tum2 ensi2 lagaski pa bil3 ga en mete na ensi2 lagaski ka ke4 Eannatum ruler of Lagash uncle of Entemena ruler of Lagas 39 42๐’‚—๐’€‰๐’†—๐’‡ท en a2 kal le๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ensi2๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’• ummaki da๐’†  ki๐’‚Š๐’•๐’‹ฉ e da sur ๐’‚—๐’€‰๐’†—๐’‡ท ๐’‰บ๐’‹ผ๐’‹› ๐’„‘๐’†ต๐’† ๐’• ๐’†  ๐’‚Š๐’•๐’‹ฉ en a2 kal le ensi2 ummaki da ki e da sur fixed the border with Enakale ruler of Umma See alsoList of languages by first written accounts Pennsylvania Sumerian Dictionary Sumerian literature Descent of Inanna into the UnderworldReferencesNotes Also written ๐’…ด๐’„€ eme gi Interestingly the poorly documented Sealand Dynasty c 1732 1460 BC which ruled in a region in Southern Mesopotamia corresponding to historical Sumer appears to have particularly favoured Sumerian Sumerian school documents from that time were found at Tell Khaiber some of which contain year names from the reign of a king with the Sumerian throne name Aya dara galama For words occurring in this article proposed revised readings based on Old Babylonian lexical lists are ambar gt abbar bansur gt bansur daแธซ gt taแธซ dis gt des eden gt edin gig2 gt geg2 imin gt umun7 inim gt enim lagas gt lagas nig in gt nig en ninda gt inda sa4 gt se21 ugu2 gt aagu2 and zaแธซ3 gt saแธซ7 Since Akkadian too had developed aspiration in the realization of its voiceless non emphatic consonants by that time that aspiration was also preserved after the extinction of Sumerian in Akkadian native speakers pronunciation of the language and is hence reflected even in Ancient Greek transcriptions of Sumerian words with the letters f 8 and x Another relatively uncommon opinion based on loanwords to and from Old Akkadian is that it was actually a voiceless dental fricative 8 as in think or a sound similar to it Above all two different signs for the syllable ne which are systematically used in different morphemes sometimes alternate so that a contraction with a following vowel e causes the replacement of ๐’‰Œ ne2 by ๐’‰ˆ ne ne2 ne e gt ne neห The suspected long eห also seems to be resistant to apocope and assimilation which are undergone by the suspected short e Some frequent words considered to contain long vowels based on borrowings into or from Akkadian are ๐’†น ambar marsh ๐’€ญ an sky ๐’„‘๐’Ž g esbansur ๐’“ bur vessel ๐’ฎ๐’ƒผ dam gar3 merchant ๐’‚ e2 from earlier haj house ๐’‚Š eg2 levee ๐’‚— en highpriest ๐’„€ gin6 firm true ๐’‹ผ๐’€€ kar harbour ๐’†ค kid reed mat ๐’ˆœ nar musician ๐’‰ฃ nun prince ๐’Š• sag head ๐’‰ช๐’• ser7 da crime and ๐’ฃ zid right Among grammatical morphemes length has been posited with greater or lesser confidence for the nominal plural marker ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ ene the 3rd person singular animate pronoun ๐’€€๐’‰ˆ a ne or ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ e ne the 1st 2nd and 3rd person plural possessive enclitics ๐’ˆจ me ๐’ช๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ zu ne ne and ๐’€€๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ a ne ne the 1st 2nd and 3rd person plural verbal prefixes ๐’ˆจ me ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ e ne and ๐’‰ˆ nne the ablative ๐’‹ซ ta the prospective prefix ๐’…‡ u3 but shortened and qualitatively assimilated in an open syllable the affirmative prefix ๐’ˆพ na and the 1st and 2nd person pronouns ๐’‚ท g e26 and ๐’ข ze2 in position before the enclitic copula ๐’ˆจ me In particular the verbs ๐’Š’ ru lay down ๐’‹ฉ sur produce fluid ๐’ƒก ur3 drag and ๐’Œด ur4 pluck take open vowel prefixes and the verbs ๐’Œฃ de2 pour ๐’‚Š e do say ๐’‡ฏ๐’บ ed3 go out ๐’†Ÿ kes2 d bind and ๐’…Š se12 live dwell plural take close vowel prefixes This is most consistent with stops With other consonants there is some vacillation depending on the consonant the following vowel the relevant morpheme the time period and the region overall sonorants favour doubling more than fricatives especially sibilants and affricates do a favours it more than e and doubling is more extensive in Old Sumerian than in subsequent periods Nonetheless some Sumerologists also posit genuine geminate consonants in Sumerian as exemplified later in the article but orthographic doubling as seen above usually is not sufficient to se predict its presence Here and in the following the first line in the interlinear glosses shows a cuneiform spelling of a Sumerian word phrase or sentence the second line in a small font shows the way in which that spelling is conventionally transliterated into the Latin alphabet the third one in italics shows a segmentation of the Sumerian phrases into morphemes the fourth one contains a gloss for each of the morphemes and the fifth one displays a translation into English The initial vowel e appears only after a consonant and is absent after a vowel Jagersma believes that it contracts with a preceding vowel while lengthening it In Old Babylonian Sumerian spellings suggesting such assimilation are found ๐’‡ฝ๐’…‡๐’‰ˆ lu2 u3 ne men As is generally the case with the vowel e the vowel of the ergative ending can contract with a preceding vowel lengthening it lu2 e gt ๐’‡ฝ๐’…‡ lu2 u3 man erg In early texts the length of the vowel isn t marked at all leaving the ending with no reflection in the spelling According to Jagersma this is a tendency due to semantic reasons but not a strict rule of the language Also known traditionally as the locative terminative It has been pointed out that the term directive is misleading since this Sumerian case simply expresses contiguity which may or may not be the result of movement in a certain direction Based on its meaning it could be called adessive but it can also express the destination of a movement making the meaning allative Similarly the Sumerian locative expresses internal location both as a stative condition inessive meaning or as the result of a movement illative meaning With animates the dative is usually used instead The final consonant k appears only in front of a following vowel in the spelling and at least by Ur III times in pronunciation as well see the section on Consonants above for this phenomenon Thus we find ๐’ˆ—๐’†ท lugal la for lugal ak of the king but ๐’ˆ—๐’†ท๐’„ฐ lugal la kam for lugal ak am it is of the king Moreover if k is preserved the preceding vowel often seems to be omitted at least in writing especially after l m n r s s and แธซ ๐’ˆ—๐’„ฐ lugal kam Conversely the initial vowel a of the genitive marker appears to be dropped or assimilated after a preceding stem final vowel in content words e g dumu ak is written simply ๐’Œ‰ dumu presumably standing for dumu k The same appears to happen after the plural marker ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ e ne and the plural possessive pronominal enclitics ๐’ˆจ me our ๐’ช๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ zu ne ne your pl and ๐’€€ ๐’‚Š ๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ a e ne ne their so that the sequences of these morphemes and the genitive end in e k However there is some disagreement on the treatment of content words and the nature of the whole process see the following footnote on this matter Finally the genitive marker occasionally seems to be simply omitted in writing especially after a fricative In front of the vowel a of the genitive marker ak and the locative marker a the possessive pronominal enclitics ๐’ˆฌ g u10 my ๐’ช zu your sing ๐’‰Œ ni his her and ๐’‰ bi its are contracted and or assimilated so that they appear as ๐’‚ท g a2 ๐’ za ๐’ˆพ na and ๐’€ ba respectively In contrast these case markers do not cause the loss of the final e in the plural marker ๐’‚Š๐’‰ˆ e ne and in the plural possessive pronominal enclitics ๐’ˆจ me our ๐’ช๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ zu ne ne your pl and ๐’€€ ๐’‚Š ๐’‰ˆ๐’‰ˆ a e ne ne their In the case of the genitive the a of the case marker is elided instead so that the genitive sequence ends in e k There is some evidence that the stem final vowel was also dropped in some content words under unclear circumstances but that this was obscured by the spelling With respect to the genitive Jagersma tentatively suggests and Zolyomi 2017 42 43 concurs that the variation in both content words and enclitics was determined by vowel length a preceding short vowel generally assimilated to the a and the product was a long aห whereas a preceding long vowel as in the plural marker which they believe to have been pronounced eneห caused dropping of the following a The allomorph r is used after vowels In early texts it may not be expressed at all Alternatively the alternation may be ignored in the spelling so that ra is written even after vowels Additionally in the Ur III period a may occur instead of ra after possessive pronominal enclitics or the genitive marker With inanimates the directive is usually used instead The meaning is not necessarily up to or until as with a terminative case but rather expresses a general direction so this case could have been called The allomorph s is used after vowels In early texts it may not be expressed graphically at all Alternatively the alternation may be ignored in the spelling so that se3 is written even after vowels Although the marker is never written with a sign for VC it seems likely that there was an allomorph d used after vowels leading to the dative marker remaining unwritten in this position in early texts Unlike the Indo European locative cases the Sumerian locative can express not only a static location but also the direction of a movement the key feature is that the spatial meaning is inessive in or superessive on Jagersma believes that like the nominalizing enclitic this marker originally began in a glottal stop ส”a The glottal stop in his view later assimilated to the preceding consonant and caused it to be geminated With animates the corresponding case in some constructions is the dative With animates the construction ๐’†  ๐’€€ ๐’‹ซ ki X a k ta lit from the place of X is used The substance someone fills something with is in the absolutive The variant with e is found in Old Babylonian and has a few attestations in Ur III Neo Sumerian The initial a is present after consonants albeit not always written especially in earlier periods but contracts with a preceding vowel The inanimate has no number distinction so ๐’‰ bi can mean both its and their The forms menden or me for we and menzen for you pl are only attested in Sumero Akkadian lexical lists and in the case of mende n in an Old Babylonian literary text Two of them seem to consist of the enclitic copula conjugated in the corresponding person and number who we are who you pl are Another form given in lexical lists is ๐’๐’‚Š๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— za e me en ze2 en clearly a combination of the personal plural you sing and the 2nd person plural form of the copula For these reasons their authenticity is considered dubious The forms menden or me for we and menzen for you pl are only attested in Sumero Akkadian lexical lists and in the case of mende n in an Old Babylonian literary text Two of them seem to consist of the enclitic copula conjugated in the corresponding person and number who we are who you pl are Another form given in lexical lists is ๐’๐’‚Š๐’ˆจ๐’‚—๐’ข๐’‚— za e me ze2 en clearly a combination of the personal plural you sing and the 2nd person plural form of the copula For these reasons their authenticity is considered dubious The variant with e is found in Old Babylonian and has a few attestations in Ur III Neo Sumerian The initial a is present after consonants albeit not always written especially in earlier periods but contracts with a preceding vowel It has been ascribed a more contrastive nuance this as opposed to others Jagersma considers the correct reading of the sign ๐’‰ bi in the possessive demonstrative enclitic to be be2 These variants are generally not used as counting words but rather as adjectives meaning single alone and the like but there are some indications that they might have functioned as numerals in very early periods or occasionally With a long vowel due to the origin from a contraction according to Jagersma The earliest attestation of these terms is from the Middle Babylonian period The original Sumerian terms may have been ๐’†ธ lugud2 short and ๐’ gid2 long As a first stage in this development Jagersma reconstructs a prehistoric Sumerian system where a signalled imperfectivity and i perfectivity before the maru แธซamแนญu tense aspect distinction took over that role แธซamแนญu forms with a were interpreted as statives increasingly marginalised in the South but given a new additional function in the North as early as the Fara period texts Jagersma 2010 548 549 The common denominator is that these sequences begin in a single consonant which makes the syllable containing u an open syllable As already seen with a number of other prefixes above assimilation generally happens in open syllables and not in closed ones For example no assimilation happens in the sequence mu n si In particular this is shown by the fact that sequences like ba n si and ba n da are possible in attested Sumerian even though ba b si and ba b da remain impossible because of the origin of ba It has been claimed that the reflexive object may also be direct in some cases It has been claimed by some that the marker on the noun can also be omitted when the corresponding verb prefix expresses the same meaning but this has been interpreted as a purely graphical phenomenon Also e in some Old Babylonian texts Note that e too had a tendency to assimilate to the preceding vowel Among other things the assumption of a geminate allomorph nn explains the fact that the finite prefix i occurs in front of the dative prefix sequence written ๐’ˆพ na and the directive prefix sequence written ๐’‰Œ ni This would have been unexpected if n were a single consonant because i otherwise never appears in front of a single consonant unless it is the stem initial one It also explains why mu is sometimes assimilated before the locative mu ni mi ni but never before the personal prefix followed by the directive mu nn i mu ni mu un ni The 1st person plural dative marker like the corresponding singular seems to include the ventive prefix Jagersma 2010 390 410 Only attested in late texts For the dative and the directive the singular form r is sometimes used with plural reference as well resulting in r a and r i respectively and this is sometimes combined with the plural suffix enzen which otherwise normally refers only to subjects and direct objects This may be an Old Babylonian innovation However the plural pronominal markers usually don t take the dative marker and never take the directive marker intead they express a dative or directive participant on their own although there are some attestations of the expected ne a and me a from the Ur III period and Old Babylonian periods The allomorph di3 is used before the locative prefix ni The variant ๐’‰ˆde3 ๐’‰ˆ ๐’‹ผde4 found in Old Babylonian Sumerian is the result of the contraction of da and a following e but sometimes also seems to occur because of assimilation to apreceding e ba e da gt ba e de Thomsen and Foxvog believe that there is also an allomorph ra used between vowels Jagersma 2010 generally assumes idiosyncratic case use in such cases The allomorph ra is used after vowels However the plural pronominal markers usually don t take the dative marker and never take the directive marker intead they express a dative or directive participant on their own although there are some attestations of the expected ne a and me a from the Ur III period and Old Babylonian periods According to Jagersma 2010 476 482 and Zolyomi 2017 206 215 the allomorph i is used after consonant while e is used after vowels In the latter case e may be assimilated to the preceding vowel while the vowel undergoes compensatory lengthening ๐’ˆฌ๐’‚Š mu e gt ๐’ˆฌ๐’…‡ mu u3 etc In Old Babylonian Sumerian it is the preceding vowel that assimilated to e ๐’•๐’‚Š da e gt ๐’‰ˆ de3 The prefix does not seem to surface at all between a vowel and a subject object prefix as in ma2 a mu na e n g ar he loaded it on the boat for her This restricts the possibilities of the co occurrence of directive forms and forces the grammar to choose which participant to express e g the dative prefixes and ba take precedence over the inanimate directive b i while there is vacillation in the choice between prioritizing it or the locative Jagersma 2010 442 444 The locative prefix is unique in that it is never attached to a pronominal prefix but rather combines in itself the pronominal and dimensional meanings meaning there or in there For this reason it appears that a directive participant is sometimes untypically cross referenced with a dative prefix in order to allow the locative to also occur in the verb form b i but b a ni Zolyomi 2017 201 222 refers to the in to on to and at constructions as locative1 locative2 and locative3 respectively Jagersma 2010 416 428 refers to the at construction as the oblique object Occasional exceptions from this restriction occur only in Old Babylonian texts Jagersma 2010 509 In Old Babylonian texts e for the 1st person singular may occur making it identical with the 2nd person singular just as they are identical in the suffixes but this may be the result of a late analogy Edzard 2003 87 cf Michalowski 2007 A significant minority of Sumerologists believe that the prefixes of the 1st and 2nd person are en rather than V and e when they stand for the object i e in maru That would be indistinguishable in writing and even possibly according to some also in speech from the 3rd person animate n A significant minority of Sumerologists believe that the prefixes of the 1st and 2nd person are en rather than e when they stand for the object i e in maru that would often be indistinguishable from the 3rd person animate n The inanimate agreement marker has no number distinction According to several researchers b as a direct object marker may be absent under conditions that are not entirely clear in particular several verbs such as ๐’Œฃ de2 pour ๐’†• ru2 build ๐’ƒป g ar put and ๐’‚Š e say very often but not always lack it

rec-icon Recommended Topics
Share this article
Read the free encyclopedia and learn everything...
See more
Read the free encyclopedia. All information in Wikipedia is available. No payment required.
Share this article on
Share
XXX 0C
Sunday, 09 March, 2025
Follow Us On